Schneider Electric Premium and Atrium using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert - IP20 and IP65 Sealed Input/Output Modules User Guide
Quảng cáo
Quảng cáo
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using
EcoStruxure™
Control Expert
IP20 and IP65 Sealed Input/Output
Modules
Setup Manual
(Original Document)
12/2018 www.schneider-electric.com
2
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein. This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications. It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof. Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein. If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication, please notify us.
You agree not to reproduce, other than for your own personal, noncommercial use, all or part of this document on any medium whatsoever without permission of Schneider Electric, given in writing. You also agree not to establish any hypertext links to this document or its content.
Schneider Electric does not grant any right or license for the personal and noncommercial use of the document or its content, except for a non-exclusive license to consult it on an "as is" basis, at your own risk. All other rights are reserved.
All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and using this product. For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance with documented system data, only the manufacturer should perform repairs to components.
When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements, the relevant instructions must be followed.
Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may result in injury, harm, or improper operating results.
Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage.
© 2018 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
35008167 12/2018
Table of Contents
Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part I Hardware installation of distributed input/output modules on Fipio bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1 General overview of TBX distributed input/output modules
1.1 TBX modules: general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Structure of Distributed Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Description of discrete monobloc TBX modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete monobloc TBX modules (IP20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sealed (IP65) Discrete Monobloc TBX Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Description of discrete and analog TBX modular modules . . . . . . . . .
Discrete and analog modular TBX modules (IP20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modular TBX modules (IP20) : the base units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modular TBX modules (IP20): Extensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TBX LEP 020 and TBX LEP 030 communication modules . . . . . . . . .
1.4 Description of the TBX SUP 10 power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . .
TBX SUP 10 power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring and characteristics of the TBX SUP 10 power supply module .
1.5 Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog of TBX IP20 discrete monobloc modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog of TBX IP65 dust and damp proof discrete monobloc modules
Catalog of discrete TBX modular modules (IP20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog of TBX modular analog modules (IP20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 Description of TBX module accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories of TBX IP20 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories of TBX IP65 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input simulators for discrete TBX (IP20) modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transistor output simulators for discrete TBX (IP20) modules . . . . . .
13
17
19
40
41
42
44
32
33
36
38
26
27
29
31
21
22
23
25
50
51
53
54
56
45
46
47
49
35008167 12/2018
3
4
Chapter 2 General installation rules for TBX distributed input/output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards : TBX IP20 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment, operating conditions and limits: TBX IP20 modules. . . .
Standards : TBX IP65 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment, operating conditions and limits: TBX IP65 modules. . . .
2.2 Installation procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a TBX IP20 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a TBX IP 65 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Installation rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arrangement of IP20 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arrangement of IP65 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Module dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monobloc or modular TBX modules (IP20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dust and damp proof monobloc TBX modules (IP65) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power supply module TBX SUP 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Module labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching the Connection/Module label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching the terminal label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6 Mounting and removing modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the modules on Telequick mounting plate or DIN rail. . . . . .
Mounting a communication module on a base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the cover and the connection cable on an extension base unit
Connecting the extension module to the base module . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting/Removing the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7 Module power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TBX IP20 module power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TBX IP65 module power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Behavior on power cut and power return of the TBX IP20 modules . .
Behavior on power cut and power return of the TBX IP65 modules . .
TBX module power consumption table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculation sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8 Module connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring TBX modules and sensors/preactuators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting discrete module power supplies (IP20). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting discrete module power supplies (IP65). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
97
98
100
101
93
94
95
96
103
104
105
107
109
86
87
89
91
81
82
83
85
76
78
79
80
68
72
73
75
63
64
65
66
59
60
61
62
35008167 12/2018
2.9 Module addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Addressing principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coding Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10 Base unit configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring IP65 discrete base units (leakage current). . . . . . . . . . . .
Access to dip-switches SW1 and SW2 (IP20 discrete base units) . . .
Configuring dip-switch SW1 (IP20 discrete base units). . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring dip-switch SW2 (IP20 discrete base units). . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3 Processing faults in TBX distributed I/O modules. . . . . .
3.1 Description of the indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the Discrete TBX IP20 Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the discrete TBX IP65 indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Fault-finding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying common faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying faults in discrete TBX modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying faults in TBX analog modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 4 Meaning of terminals of TBX distributed input/output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meaning of terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 5 The TBX CEP 1622 distributed input module . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to the TBX CEP 1622 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX CEP 1622 . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the module TBX CEP 1622 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 6 The TBX CSP 1622 distributed output module. . . . . . . .
Introduction to the TBX CSP 1622 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX CSP 1622 . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the module TBX CSP 1622 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 7 The TBX CSP 1625 distributed output module. . . . . . . .
Introduction to the TBX CSP 1625 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX CSP 1625 . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the module TBX CSP 1625 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 8 The TBX EEP 08C22 distributed input module. . . . . . . .
Introduction to the TBX EEP 08C22 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX EEP 08C22 . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the module TBX EEP 08C22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
144
147
148
149
151
153
154
155
157
133
133
135
136
137
138
141
142
121
122
123
124
126
127
129
130
110
111
112
115
116
117
118
120
35008167 12/2018
5
6
Chapter 9 The TBX ESP 08C22 distributed output module . . . . . . .
159
Introduction to the TBX ESP 08C22 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX ESP 08C22 . . . . . . . . .
160
161
Connecting the TBX ESP 08C22 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
Chapter 10 The TBX EEP 1622 distributed input module. . . . . . . . . .
165
Introduction to the TBX EEP 1622 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX EEP 1622. . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the module TBX EEP 1622. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
169
Chapter 11 The TBX ESP 1622 distributed output module. . . . . . . . .
171
Introduction to the TBX ESP 1622 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166
167
Characteristics of the TBX ESP 1622 Module Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the TBX ESP 1622 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
175
Chapter 12 The TBX DES 1622 distributed input module. . . . . . . . . .
179
Introduction to the TBX DES 1622 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
173
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 1622. . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the module TBX DES 1622. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
182
Chapter 13 The TBX DES 16C22 distributed input module . . . . . . . .
185
Introduction to the TBX DES 16C22 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
180
181
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 16C22 . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the module TBX DES 16C22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
190
Chapter 14 The TBX DES 16F22 distributed input module. . . . . . . . .
193
Introduction to the TBX DES 16F22 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
186
188
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 16F22 . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the module TBX DES 16F22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
197
Chapter 15 The TBX DES 1633 distributed input module. . . . . . . . . .
199
Introduction to the TBX DES 1633 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
194
196
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 1633. . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the module TBX DES 1633. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
202
Chapter 16 The TBX DMS 16C22 distributed input/output module. . .
205
Introduction to the TBX DMS 16C22 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 16C22. . . .
200
201
206
208
Connecting the module TBX DMS 16C22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211
Chapter 17 The TBX DMS 16P22 distributed input/output module. . .
213
Introduction to the TBX DMS 16P22 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 16P22. . . .
Connecting the module TBX DMS 16P22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
214
216
218
35008167 12/2018
Chapter 18 The TBX DMS 16C222 distributed input/output module.
Introduction to the TBX DMS 16C222 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 16C222 . .
Connecting the module TBX DMS 16C222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 19 The TBX DMS 1025 distributed input/output module . . .
Introduction to the TBX DMS 1025 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 1025. . . . .
Connecting the module TBX DMS 1025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 20 The TBX DMS 1625 distributed input/output module . . .
Introduction to the TBX DMS 1625 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 1625. . . . .
Connecting the module TBX DMS 1625 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 21 The TBX DSS 1622 distributed output module. . . . . . . .
Introduction to the TBX DSS 1622 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DSS 1622 . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the module TBX DSS 1622 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 22 The TBX DSS 16C22 distributed output module . . . . . .
Introduction to the TBX DSS 16C22 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DSS 16C22 . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the module TBX DSS 16C22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 23 The TBX DSS 1625 distributed output module. . . . . . . .
Introduction to the TBX DSS 1625 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DSS 1625 . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the module TBX DSS 1625 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 24 The TBX DSS 1235 distributed output module. . . . . . . .
Introduction to the TBX DSS 1235 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DSS 1235 . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the module TBX DSS 1235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 25 The TBX DES 16S04 distributed input module. . . . . . . .
Introduction to the TBX DES 16S04 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 16S04 . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the module TBX DES 16S04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 26 The TBX DMS 16S44 distributed input/output module . .
Introduction to the TBX DMS 16S44 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 16S44 . . .
Connecting the module TBX DMS 16S44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
265
266
267
269
273
274
275
276
253
254
256
257
259
260
261
263
277
278
279
281
239
240
241
244
247
248
249
250
221
222
224
227
231
232
233
236
35008167 12/2018
7
8
Chapter 27 The TBX AES 400 distributed input module. . . . . . . . . . .
283
Introduction to the TBX AES 400 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX AES 400. . . . . . . . . . . . .
284
285
Connecting the module TBX AES 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring example for the TBX AES 400 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring and installation recommendations for the model TBX AES 400
293
Chapter 28 The TBX ASS 200 distributed output module. . . . . . . . . .
297
Introduction to the TBX ASS 200 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
288
290
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX ASS 200. . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the module TBX ASS 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring and installation recommendations for the model TBX ASS 200
Wiring and installation recommendations for the model TBX AMS 620
298
299
300
302
Chapter 29 The TBX AMS 620 distributed input/output module . . . . .
303
Introduction to the TBX AMS 620 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX AMS 620 . . . . . . . . . . .
304
305
Connecting the module TBX AMS 620 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
307
310
Part II Software Installation of Remote Discrete
Input/Output Modules on the Fipio Bus . . . . . . . . . .
313
Chapter 30 General Introduction to the Discrete Application -Specific
Function Applied to Remote TBX Modules. . . . . . . . . . . .
315
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.1 Configuration of a Remote TBX Input/Output Module: General. . . . . .
315
Chapter 31 Discrete Application Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
317
Description of the Discrete Remote Module Configuration Screen . . .
31.2 Discrete Input/Output Channel Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters of the Remote TBX Discrete Inputs on the Fipio Bus . . . .
318
318
320
321
Parameters of the Remote 8-, 10- or 12-Channel TBX Discrete Outputs on the Fipio Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters of the Remote 16-Channel TBX Discrete Outputs on the
Fipio Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.3 Configuration of Discrete Module Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
322
323
324
How to Configure Programmable Channels for the TBX DMS 16P22
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Modify the Task Parameter of a Remote Discrete Module . . .
How to Modify the Wiring Check Parameter of a Discrete TBX Module
325
327
328
35008167 12/2018
How to Modify the Filtering Parameter of a Discrete Input Module . . .
How to Modify the Latch Parameter of a Discrete Input Module . . . . .
329
330
How to Modify the Fallback Mode Parameter for a Discrete Output TBX
Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to modify the Reactivation of Outputs Parameter of a Discrete
TBX module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 32 Presentation of Discrete Application Language Objects.
32.1 Remote TBX Input/Output Module Language Objects and IODDTs . .
331
332
333
334
Presentation of Language Objects of the Discrete Application Function
Associated with Remote Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Implicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application-
Specific Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application-
Specific Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Management of Exchanges and Reports with Explicit Objects . . . . . .
32.2 IODDTs of the TBX Remote Input/Output Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Details of T_DIS_IN_GEN-Type IODDT Implicit Exchange Objects . .
Details of T_DIS_IN_FIP_STD-Type IODDT Implicit Exchange Objects
335
336
Details of T_DIS_IN_FIP_STD-Type IODDT Explicit Exchange Objects
Chapter 33 Debug of the TBX Remote Input/Output Modules . . . . .
Introduction to the Debug Function of a Remote Discrete Module . . .
346
Details of the Implicit Exchange Objects of the IODDT of the
T_DIS_OUT_GEN Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Details of T_DIS_OUT_STD-Type IODDT Implicit Exchange Objects
Details of T_DIS_OUT_STD-Type IODDT Explicit Exchange Objects
Description of the Debug Screen for a Discrete Remote Module . . . .
How to Access the Forcing/Unforcing Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Access the SET and RESET Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 34 Diagnostics of the Remote Input/Output Discrete TBX
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Access the Discrete Module Diagnostics Function . . . . . . . . .
How to Access the Channel Diagnostics Function of a Discrete Module
Part III Software Installation of Remote Analog Input/Output
359
360
362
Modules on the Fipio Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
363
Chapter 35 General Introduction to the Analog Application -Specific
Function Applied to Remote TBX Modules. . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
365
365
348
349
350
353
354
355
357
358
337
339
343
344
345
35008167 12/2018
9
10
Chapter 36 Remote TBX analog modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
367
36.1 TBX AES 400 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introducing the TBX AES 400 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
368
369
Timing of measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overflow Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensor Link Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensor Alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36.2 TBX ASS 200 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introducing the TBX ASS 200 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output characteristics for the TBX ASS 200 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overflow Monitoring for Module TBX ASS 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36.3 TBX AMS 620 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introducing the TBX AMS 620 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing of measurements on inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Under/Overshoot Monitoring on Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filtering Measurements on Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
382
383
384
386
387
390
391
393
371
372
374
375
376
378
379
380
Displaying measurements on inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Overflow Monitoring for Module TBX AMS 620 . . . . . . . . . . . .
394
395
396
397
Sensor Alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
399
Chapter 37 Configuring the Analog Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
401
37.1 Configuring a Remote TBX Analog Module: General . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the Configuration Screen of an Analog TBX Module . .
37.2 Analog Input/Output Channel Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Parameters for Remote Analog TBX Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Parameters for Remote TBX Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37.3 Configuration of Analog Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modification of the Range for an Input or Output of an Analog Module
Modification of the Task Associated with an Analog Module Channel.
Modification of the Display Format for a Voltage or Current Channel .
402
402
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
Modification of the Display Format for a Thermocouple or
Thermoprobe Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modification of the Filtering Value for Analog Module Channels . . . . .
Modification of the Fallback Mode for Analog Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . .
411
412
413
35008167 12/2018
Chapter 38 Presentation of Analog Application Language Objects. .
38.1 Remote TBX Analog Module Language Objects and IODDTs . . . . . .
415
416
Presentation of Language Objects of the Analog Application Function
Associated with Remote Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38.2 Analog Module IODDTs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
416
417
Detail of the Language Objects of the IODDT of the T_ANA_IN_GEN
Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Details of T_ANA_IN_STD-Type IODDT Implicit Exchange Objects .
Details of T_ANA_IN_STD-Type IODDT Explicit Exchange Objects .
Input Channel Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 40 Calibration of the Remote TBX Analog Modules . . . . . .
Calibration Function for a Remote Analog TBX Module . . . . . . . . . . .
TBX AMS 620 Module Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 41 Diagnostics of the Remote Analog TBX Modules. . . . . .
Diagnostics of an Analog Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
418
419
420
Detail of the Language Objects of the IODDT of the T_ANA_OUT_GEN
Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Details of T_ANA_OUT_STD-Type IODDT Implicit Exchange Objects
Details of T_ANA_OUT_STD-Type IODDT Explicit Exchange Objects
Chapter 39 Debug of the Remote TBX Analog Modules. . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of the Debug Function for a Remote Analog Module . . .
Description of the Debug screen of an Analog TBX Module . . . . . . . .
Modification of the Channel Filtering Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TBX AES 400 Module Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detailed Diagnostics of an Analog Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
433
434
437
439
441
442
444
422
423
424
427
428
429
431
432
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
447
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
449
35008167 12/2018
11
12
35008167 12/2018
Safety Information
Important Information
NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain it. The following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
35008167 12/2018
13
PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation of electrical equipment and its installation, and has received safety training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
Do not use this product on machinery lacking effective point-of-operation guarding. Lack of effective point-of-operation guarding on a machine can result in serious injury to the operator of that machine.
WARNING
UNGUARDED EQUIPMENT
Do not use this software and related automation equipment on equipment which does not have point-of-operation protection.
Do not reach into machinery during operation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
This automation equipment and related software is used to control a variety of industrial processes.
The type or model of automation equipment suitable for each application will vary depending on factors such as the control function required, degree of protection required, production methods, unusual conditions, government regulations, etc. In some applications, more than one processor may be required, as when backup redundancy is needed.
Only you, the user, machine builder or system integrator can be aware of all the conditions and factors present during setup, operation, and maintenance of the machine and, therefore, can determine the automation equipment and the related safeties and interlocks which can be properly used. When selecting automation and control equipment and related software for a particular application, you should refer to the applicable local and national standards and regulations. The
National Safety Council's Accident Prevention Manual (nationally recognized in the United States of America) also provides much useful information.
In some applications, such as packaging machinery, additional operator protection such as pointof-operation guarding must be provided. This is necessary if the operator's hands and other parts of the body are free to enter the pinch points or other hazardous areas and serious injury can occur.
Software products alone cannot protect an operator from injury. For this reason the software cannot be substituted for or take the place of point-of-operation protection.
14
35008167 12/2018
Ensure that appropriate safeties and mechanical/electrical interlocks related to point-of-operation protection have been installed and are operational before placing the equipment into service. All interlocks and safeties related to point-of-operation protection must be coordinated with the related automation equipment and software programming.
NOTE: Coordination of safeties and mechanical/electrical interlocks for point-of-operation protection is outside the scope of the Function Block Library, System User Guide, or other implementation referenced in this documentation.
START-UP AND TEST
Before using electrical control and automation equipment for regular operation after installation, the system should be given a start-up test by qualified personnel to verify correct operation of the equipment. It is important that arrangements for such a check be made and that enough time is allowed to perform complete and satisfactory testing.
WARNING
EQUIPMENT OPERATION HAZARD
Verify that all installation and set up procedures have been completed.
Before operational tests are performed, remove all blocks or other temporary holding means used for shipment from all component devices.
Remove tools, meters, and debris from equipment.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Follow all start-up tests recommended in the equipment documentation. Store all equipment documentation for future references.
Software testing must be done in both simulated and real environments.
Verify that the completed system is free from all short circuits and temporary grounds that are not installed according to local regulations (according to the National Electrical Code in the U.S.A, for instance). If high-potential voltage testing is necessary, follow recommendations in equipment documentation to prevent accidental equipment damage.
Before energizing equipment:
Remove tools, meters, and debris from equipment.
Close the equipment enclosure door.
Remove all temporary grounds from incoming power lines.
Perform all start-up tests recommended by the manufacturer.
35008167 12/2018
15
OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENTS
The following precautions are from the NEMA Standards Publication ICS 7.1-1995 (English version prevails):
Regardless of the care exercised in the design and manufacture of equipment or in the selection and ratings of components, there are hazards that can be encountered if such equipment is
improperly operated.
It is sometimes possible to misadjust the equipment and thus produce unsatisfactory or unsafe operation. Always use the manufacturer’s instructions as a guide for functional adjustments.
Personnel who have access to these adjustments should be familiar with the equipment manufacturer’s instructions and the machinery used with the electrical equipment.
Only those operational adjustments actually required by the operator should be accessible to the operator. Access to other controls should be restricted to prevent unauthorized changes in operating characteristics.
16
35008167 12/2018
About the Book
At a Glance
Document Scope
This manual describes the implementation of hardware and software for TBX IP20 and IP65 remote input/output modules with Premium and Atrium PLCs.
Validity Note
This documentation is valid for EcoStruxure™ Control Expert 14.0 or later.
The technical characteristics of the devices described in the present document also appear online.
To access the information online:
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Action
Go to the Schneider Electric home page www.schneider-electric.com
.
In the Search box type the reference of a product or the name of a product range.
Do not include blank spaces in the reference or product range.
To get information on grouping similar modules, use asterisks ( * ).
If you entered a reference, go to the Product Datasheets search results and click on the reference that interests you.
If you entered the name of a product range, go to the Product Ranges search results and click on the product range that interests you.
If more than one reference appears in the Products search results, click on the reference that interests you.
Depending on the size of your screen, you may need to scroll down to see the data sheet.
To save or print a data sheet as a .pdf file, click Download XXX product datasheet.
The characteristics that are presented in the present document should be the same as those characteristics that appear online. In line with our policy of constant improvement, we may revise content over time to improve clarity and accuracy. If you see a difference between the document and online information, use the online information as your reference.
35008167 12/2018
17
Related Documents
Title of Documentation Reference Number
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Fipio Bus, Setup Manual 35008155 (English),
35008156 (French),
35008157 (German),
35013953 (Italian),
35008158 (Spanish),
35013954 (Chinese)
You can download these technical publications and other technical information from our website at https://www.schneider-electric.com/en/download
Product Related Information
WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems. Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program, install, alter, and apply this product.
Follow all local and national safety codes and standards.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
18
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX modules
35008167 12/2018
Hardware installation of distributed input/output modules on Fipio bus Part I
Hardware installation of distributed input/output modules on
Fipio bus
Subject of this Part
This part presents the range of TBX modules on Premium PLCs.
What Is in This Part?
This part contains the following chapters:
12
13
14
15
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
Chapter
1
2
3
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
Chapter Name
General overview of TBX distributed input/output modules
General installation rules for TBX distributed input/output modules
Processing faults in TBX distributed I/O modules
Meaning of terminals of TBX distributed input/output modules
The TBX CEP 1622 distributed input module
The TBX CSP 1622 distributed output module
The TBX CSP 1625 distributed output module
The TBX EEP 08C22 distributed input module
The TBX ESP 08C22 distributed output module
The TBX EEP 1622 distributed input module
The TBX ESP 1622 distributed output module
The TBX DES 1622 distributed input module
The TBX DES 16C22 distributed input module
The TBX DES 16F22 distributed input module
The TBX DES 1633 distributed input module
The TBX DMS 16C22 distributed input/output module
The TBX DMS 16P22 distributed input/output module
The TBX DMS 16C222 distributed input/output module
The TBX DMS 1025 distributed input/output module
The TBX DMS 1625 distributed input/output module
The TBX DSS 1622 distributed output module
The TBX DSS 16C22 distributed output module
The TBX DSS 1625 distributed output module
35008167 12/2018
Page
19
TBX modules
26
27
28
29
Chapter
24
25
Chapter Name
The TBX DSS 1235 distributed output module
The TBX DES 16S04 distributed input module
The TBX DMS 16S44 distributed input/output module
The TBX AES 400 distributed input module
The TBX ASS 200 distributed output module
The TBX AMS 620 distributed input/output module
Page
20
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX: General overview
35008167 12/2018
General overview of TBX distributed input/output modules Chapter 1
General overview of TBX distributed input/output modules
Subject of this chapter
This chapter provides a general overview of TBX distributed input/output modules.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following sections:
1.4
1.5
1.6
Section
1.1
1.2
1.3
Topic
TBX modules: general
Description of discrete monobloc TBX modules
Description of discrete and analog TBX modular modules
Description of the TBX SUP 10 power supply module
Catalog
Description of TBX module accessories
Page
35008167 12/2018
21
TBX: General overview
TBX modules: general Section 1.1
TBX modules: general
Subject of this section
This section provides a general overview of TBX distributed input/output modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
General
Hardware Structure of Distributed Input/Output Modules
Page
22
35008167 12/2018
TBX: General overview
General
Distributed inputs/outputs
The decentralization of inputs/outputs enables the requirements of both users and machine manufacturers to be met while obtaining performance comparable with that of a centralized architecture:
the volume of wiring connected to sensors and preactuators is reduced, mechanical constraints associated with wiring ducts are eliminated, time required for designing and testing connections is reduced, machine or plant availability is maximized, installations are more flexible and open to expansion,
PLCs can be operated more rationally.
TBX modules
TBX distributed input/output modules provide the following:
a high level of adaptability: they may be mounted in any position, on any type of support
(mounting plate, frame, DIN rail for TBX IP20s, etc.), in all industrial environments, the interface elements take up less space, easy to set up and connect: sensors and preactuators are directly connected to screw terminals
(eliminating the need for intermediate terminal blocks), integral commons, several marking levels (operational, electrical, for identifying modules and connection points, etc.), connection close to the sensors and preactuators in a harsh environment using TBX IP65,
A high level of modularity in order to adapt to the number and type of sensors and preactuators in a cell: input modules, output modules, mixed input/output modules and modules with programmable channels, local management of operating modes and diagnostics, of connection points and connected channels, conformity with international standards.
35008167 12/2018
23
TBX: General overview
Connection
TBX distributed input/output modules are connected to the processor via the Fipio fieldbus, which provides 126 connection points for TBX modules.
24
35008167 12/2018
TBX: General overview
Hardware Structure of Distributed Input/Output Modules
TBX modules
There are three types of TBX remote input/output modules:
Monobloc TBXs
Sealed TBXs
comprising only one element, which cannot be extended (IP20),
comprising only one element, which cannot be extended (IP65).
They have 8 inputs, 8 outputs, 16 inputs or 16 outputs,
Modular TBXs
assembled by the user by combining a communication module and a base unit, which constitutes a basic module (IP20).
This base can be extended by a second base, using a connection cable and equipped with a cap connected to the communication module.
This enables the number of TBX connection points to be doubled.
The modular structure and ability to mix modular TBXs means that they can be better adapted to the requirements of the cell.
The following diagram illustrates the differences between the three types of TBX module.
35008167 12/2018
25
TBX: General overview
Description of discrete monobloc TBX modules Section 1.2
Description of discrete monobloc TBX modules
Subject of this section
This section provides the physical description of TBX discrete monobloc (IP20) and dust and damp proof monobloc (IP65) modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Discrete monobloc TBX modules (IP20)
Sealed (IP65) Discrete Monobloc TBX Modules
Page
26
35008167 12/2018
TBX: General overview
Discrete monobloc TBX modules (IP20)
General
Discrete monobloc TBX modules (IP20) consist of either 16 discrete 24 V DC inputs, or 16 discrete
0.5 A transistor outputs, protected against overload and short-circuits, or 16 relay outputs. They cannot be extended.
The Fipio connection point address assignment is set by 8 dip-switches (the 3 most significant dipswitches are not set), allowing up to 31 monobloc modules to be connected to the bus; Address 0 is reserved for the PLC (see Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Fipio Bus,
Setup Manual) . A display block indicates locally the status of the module and its inputs or outputs.
At a Glance
TBX monobloc modules have the following components:
An element which groups together the communication electronics and the input and/or output interfaces (1), a removable terminal block (2) enabling the sensors or preactuators to be connected directly to the 16 discrete inputs/outputs of the module. The necessary power supplies are also wired to the terminal block.
The following diagram shows a discrete monobloc TBX module.
The TBX BLP 01 connector enables the module to be connected to the Fipio bus (see Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Fipio Bus, Setup Manual) .
35008167 12/2018
27
TBX: General overview
Physical description
The following is a detailed diagram of the discrete monobloc TBX module.
6
7
4
5
8
9
2
3
Number
1
10
The following is a detailed diagram of the discrete monobloc TBX module.
Description
9 pin male SUB D connector for connecting to the Fipio bus via the TBX BLP 01 connector.
8 dip-switches for setting the Fipio connection point address
.
Memo label for the Fipio connection point address setting.
Location for customer's Connection point address and Module number identification label.
Display block
Fixing lugs for the module.
Identification label indicating the type of module channels.
Screw clamp for grounding the unit.
Removable screw terminal block (with terminal block label) for wiring to sensors, preactuators and power supplies.
Extractors for removing the terminal block.
28
35008167 12/2018
TBX: General overview
Sealed (IP65) Discrete Monobloc TBX Modules
General
Sealed (IP65) TBX monobloc Discrete modules comprise either 8 or 16 Discrete 24 VDC inputs, or 8 or 16 Discrete 0.5 A static outputs, protected against overloads and short-circuits.
The Fipio connection point address assignment is set by 8 dip-switches, allowing up to 126 monobloc modules (IP65) to be connected to the bus (these dip-switches are located inside the
TSX BLP 10 connector). Addresses 0 and 63 are reserved.
(see Premium and Atrium Using
EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Fipio Bus, Setup Manual)
A display indicates locally the status of the module and its inputs or outputs.
At a Glance
Sealed discrete TBX modules comprise only one element which includes the communication electronics and the input or output interfaces, depending on the model.
Each channel is fitted with an M12 5-pin female fast connector.
The output module has a power supply connector which is used to supply the outputs and the loads.
The following diagram shows the sealed Discrete TBX module.
The TBX BLP 10 connector enables the module to be connected to the Fipio bus (see Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Fipio Bus, Setup Manual) .
35008167 12/2018
29
TBX: General overview
Physical Description
The following is a detailed diagram of the sealed Discrete monobloc TBX module.
7
8
9
5
6
3
4
Number
1
2
The following is a detailed diagram of the sealed Discrete monobloc TBX module.
Description
15 pin male SUB D connector for connecting to the Fipio bus, via the TBX BLP 10 connector.
8 dip-switches (in the TBX BLP 10 connector) for setting the Fipio connection point address
Display panel
.
Fixing for the module.
Identification label indicating the type of module channels.
Screw clamp for grounding the product.
Input or output channel connectors.
Power supply connector (output modules only).
Self-adhesive label for customer's Connection point address and Module number (to be attached to the
TBX BLP 10 connector).
30
35008167 12/2018
TBX: General overview
Description of discrete and analog TBX modular modules Section 1.3
Description of discrete and analog TBX modular modules
Subject of this section
This section provides the physical description of TBX discrete and analog modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Discrete and analog modular TBX modules (IP20)
Modular TBX modules (IP20) : the base units
Modular TBX modules (IP20): Extensions
TBX LEP 020 and TBX LEP 030 communication modules
Page
35008167 12/2018
31
TBX: General overview
Discrete and analog modular TBX modules (IP20)
General
The number of inputs/outputs in a modular TBX is defined by the number (1 or 2) and the type of base units used.
This number can be from 10 to 32 for discrete base units, and from 4 to 16 for analogue base units.
The Fipio connection point address assignment is set via 8 dip-switches allowing up to 126 modular TBX modules to be connected to the bus. Addresses 0 and 62 are reserved for the PLC and the terminal (see Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Fipio Bus, Setup
Manual) .
outputs: basic and extension modules.
At a Glance
The modular TBX module has 4 physical components:
a communication module (1) and a base unit (2), for the basic module, a connection cable/cover (3) and a base unit (4), for the extension module,
The following diagram shows a modular TBX module.
32
The base units (2) and (4) share the same features and thus are interchangeable.
35008167 12/2018
TBX: General overview
Modular TBX modules (IP20) : the base units
General
The modular TBX modules are composed of a base unit and an optional extension. The base unit is composed of the following elements:
a TSX LEP ••• (1) communication module
PLC via the Fipio bus,
I/O. The necessary power supplies are also wired to the terminal block.
A connection cable (4) for linking the extension module module.
( see page 38 ) which enables communication with the
a base unit (2) with discrete and/or analog inputs and/or outputs, a removable terminal block (3) for direct connection of the sensors and/or preactuators to the
( see page 36 ) to the communication
The following diagram shows the base unit of a modular TBX module.
The TBX BLP 01 connector enables the module to be connected to the Fipio bus (see Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Fipio Bus, Setup Manual) .
35008167 12/2018
33
TBX: General overview
Physical description
The base units are assembled with a TBX LEP ••• communication module to form a basic module, or with a TBX CBS 010 assembly to form an extension module. Sensors can be connected directly to the inputs, and preactuators to the outputs and the power supplies, by means of the screw terminal.
The references are:
for discrete input/output base units:
TBX DES ••• for input base units,
TBX DSS ••• for output base units,
TBX DMS ••• for mixed I/O base units.
for analog input/output base units:
TBX AES ••• for input base units,
TBX ASS ••• for output base units,
TBX AMS ••• for mixed input/output base units.
The following diagram shows a TBX base unit.
4
5
2
3
Number
1
The following table describes the various elements of the TBX base unit.
Description
32-pin female 1/2 DIN connector for connection to the communication module.
Location for customer's Connection point address and Module number identification label.
Fixing lugs for the module.
Identification label indicating the type of base unit channels.
Screw clamp for grounding the unit.
34
35008167 12/2018
7
8
9
Number
6
TBX: General overview
Description
Removable screw terminal block (with terminal block label) for wiring to sensors, preactuators and power supplies.
Extractors for removing the terminal block.
Tabs for fixing the communication module or cover.
Cover for access to electronic board for configuring the bases with input wiring check facilities.
35008167 12/2018
35
TBX: General overview
Modular TBX modules (IP20): Extensions
General
The modular TBX modules are composed of a base unit and an optional extension. The extension is composed of the following elements:
A protective cover for the base unit (1),
A base unit (2) featuring Discrete and/or analog inputs and/or outputs.
A removable terminal block (3) for direct connection of the sensors and/or preactuators to the
I/O. The necessary power supplies are also wired to the terminal block,
A connection cable (4) for linking the communication module module.
to the extension
The following diagram shows the base unit of a modular TBX extension.
Physical Description
The TBX CBS 010 assembly comprises:
A connection cable enabling the extension base unit to be connected to the communication module.
A cover, which is fixed to the extension base unit, protects the connector and gives the extension module (base unit + cover) a similar size and shape to that of the base module.
A self-adhesive label is used to label the channels 16 to 31.
To connect the extension module to the basic module, the connection cable between the 32pin 1/2 DIN connector on the communication module and the 32-pin 1/2 DIN connector on the extension base unit is first connected, and then the cover is placed over this base unit and fixed in place.
36
35008167 12/2018
The following diagram shows a TBX cover/connection cable.
TBX: General overview
The following table describes the various elements of the TBX base unit.
Number Description
1 32-pin male 1/2 DIN compound filled connector for linking the extension base unit to the communication module.
2
3
4
Flexible connection cable complete with connector 1 and a 32-pin male
1/2 DIN connector for connection to the base unit.
Location for customer's Connection point address and Module number identification label.
4 screws for fixing cover to its base unit.
35008167 12/2018
37
TBX: General overview
TBX LEP 020 and TBX LEP 030 communication modules
General
The TBX LEP 020 or TBX LEP 030 communication module enables communication with the PLC, via the Fipio bus.
It is connected to the base unit to which it is fixed by a 32-pin male 1/2 DIN connector located in its lower section. A 32 pin female 1/2 DIN connector, protected by a cover, is used to connect the base unit for the extension.
NOTE: For a connection point comprising only the Discrete TBX modules, either a TBX LEP 020, or a TBX LEP 030 module may be used.
For a connection point comprising analog TBX modules, it is obligatory to use the TBX LEP 030 module.
Physical Description
The following diagram shows the TBX LEP 0•0 communication module.
38
2
3
4
The following table describes the different elements of the TBX LEP ••• communication module.
5
6
Number
1
Description
9 pin male SUB D connector for connecting to the Fipio bus, via the TBX BLP 01 connector.
8 dip-switches for setting the Fipio connection point address
Memo label for the Fipio connection point address setting.
Location for customer's Connection point address and Module number identification label.
Display block for the basic and extension modules.
Access hatch to extension connection.
35008167 12/2018
TBX: General overview
Number
7
8
Description
32-pin female 1/2 DIN connector for connecting the extension base unit.
4 screws for fixing the communication module to the base unit.
Technical Specifications
The following table describes the technical specifications of the TBX LEP ••• communication module.
TBX LEP ••• Module
Nominal voltage
Supply voltage
Current drawn
Power dissipated in the module
24 VDC or 48 VDC
19.2 VDC to 60 VDC
70 mA at 24 VDC, 35 mA at 48 VDC
1.7 W
Dielectric strength between FIP line and ground.
500 VAC 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Dielectric strength between the associated base unit I/O and ground.
Protection against a reverse polarity on +SV
1500 VAC 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Yes, via diode in series
35008167 12/2018
39
TBX: General overview
Description of the TBX SUP 10 power supply module Section 1.4
Description of the TBX SUP 10 power supply module
Subject of this section
This section provides the physical description of the TBX SUP 10 module.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
TBX SUP 10 power supply module
Wiring and characteristics of the TBX SUP 10 power supply module
Page
40
35008167 12/2018
TBX: General overview
TBX SUP 10 power supply module
General
For sites which do not have a 24 V DC power supply, you are provided with a TBX SUP 10
24 V DC / 1 A power supply module. This provides the power required for a number of TBX
The primary of this power supply module is itself powered by 110/230 V AC 50/60 Hz or 110/125 V
DC
Physical description
The following diagram shows the power supply module TBX SUP 10.
The following table describes the various elements of the power supply module TBX SUP 10.
2
3
Number
1
4
Description
Screw terminal block for wiring to power supplies.
Identification label for wiring terminals.
Power ON indicator lamp.
Fixing lugs for the module.
35008167 12/2018
41
TBX: General overview
Wiring and characteristics of the TBX SUP 10 power supply module
Wiring
The following diagram shows the TBX SUP 10 power supply module wiring diagram.
42
NOTE: Primary : If the module is powered by 110/230 V AC, neutral and live connections must be respected when wiring. However, if the module is powered by 110/125 V DC, polarity is not important.
WARNING
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK
Connect the ground terminal of the module to the protective ground using a green/yellow wire.
The -24 V terminal (0 V potential) must be connected to ground at the power supply module output.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
35008167 12/2018
TBX: General overview
Characteristics
The following table describes the technical characteristics of the power supply module
TBX SUP 10.
Primary Nominal voltage
Secondary
Voltage limits
Frequency
Output power
Output voltage
Maximum current
Protection
Hold time
Climatic environment Storage
Operation
Relative humidity
Altitude
100 - 110 - 120 V AC 110 - 125 V DC
200 - 230 - 240 V AC
90 - 264 V AC
47 - 63 Hz
88 - 156 V DC
24 W
24 V DC 5%
1 A against short-circuits, overload and overvoltage
≥10 ms
-25 to +70 °C
0 to 60 °C
5 to 95% (without condensation)
0 to 2000m
35008167 12/2018
43
TBX: General overview
Catalog Section 1.5
Catalog
Subject of this section
This section presents the complete catalog of TBX distributed input/output modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Catalog of TBX IP20 discrete monobloc modules
Catalog of TBX IP65 dust and damp proof discrete monobloc modules
Catalog of discrete TBX modular modules (IP20)
Catalog of TBX modular analog modules (IP20)
Page
44
35008167 12/2018
TBX: General overview
Catalog of TBX IP20 discrete monobloc modules
Catalog
The following table presents the catalog of TBX discrete monobloc modules (IP20).
Type of module
Illustration
TBX IP20 discrete monobloc modules
Channel types
Number of channels
Range
Reference inputs
16
24 V
TBX CEP 1622 transistor outputs
16
24 V
0.5 A
TBX CSP 1622 relay outputs
16
50VA
TBX CSP 1625
35008167 12/2018
45
TBX: General overview
Catalog of TBX IP65 dust and damp proof discrete monobloc modules
Catalog
The following table presents the catalog of TBX discrete dust and damp proof monobloc modules
(IP65).
Type of module
Illustration
TBX IP65 Dust and damp proof discrete monobloc modules
Channel types
Number of channels
Range
Wiring check
Reference inputs
8 transistor outputs inputs
8 16 transistor outputs
16
24 V 24 V
0.5 A
24 V 24 V
0.5 A
Yes Yes No No
TBX EEP 08C22 TBX ESP 08C22 TBX EEP 1622 TBX ESP 1622
46
35008167 12/2018
TBX: General overview
Catalog of discrete TBX modular modules (IP20)
Catalog of input modules
The following table presents the catalog of TBX discrete modular input modules (IP20).
Type of module
Illustration discrete modular TBX modules
Channel types
Number of channels
Range
Wiring check
Programmable filter
Reference inputs
16
24 V
No
No
TBX DES 1622 inputs
16
24 V
Yes
No inputs
16
24 V
No
Yes inputs
16
48 V
No
No
TBX DES 16C22 TBX DES 16 F22 TBX DES 1633 inputs
16
120 V AC
No
No
TBX DES 16S04
Catalog of output modules
The following table presents the catalog of TBX discrete modular output modules (IP20).
Type of module
Illustration discrete modular TBX modules
Channel types
Number of channels
Range
Wiring check
Reference
35008167 12/2018 transistor outputs
16
24 V
0.5 A
No
TBX DSS 1622 transistor outputs
16
24 V
0.5 A
Yes
TBX DSS 16C22 relay outputs
16
50 VA
No
TBX DSS 1625 relay outputs
12
100 VA
No
TBX DSS 1235
47
TBX: General overview
Catalog of input/output modules
The following table presents the catalog of discrete modular TBX input/ output modules (IP20).
Type of module
Illustration discrete modular TBX modules
Channel types
Number of inputs 8 inputs
Number of outputs 8 outputs
Range (inputs)
Range (outputs)
Wiring check
Reference transistor inputs/outputs
24 V
24 V 0.5 A transistor inputs/outputs
0 to 16 inputs
0 to 8 outputs
24 V
24 V 0.5 A transistor inputs/outputs
8 inputs
8 outputs
24 V
24 V 2 A relay inputs/ outputs
8 inputs
2 outputs
24 V
50 VA
Yes No Yes No
TBX DMS 16C22 TBX DMS 16P22 TBX DMS 16C222 TBX DMS
1025 relay inputs/ outputs
8 inputs
8 outputs
24 V
50 VA
No
TBX DMS
1625 triac inputs/ outputs
8 inputs
8 outputs
120 V AC
120 V AC
No
TBX DMS
16S44
Catalog of communication modules
The following table presents the catalog of communication and connection modules for discrete base units (IP20).
Type of module
Illustration
Communication module for connecting to the discrete base unit
Communication module on the discrete base unit.
Connection module on the extension base unit.
Reference TBX LEP 020/030
48
TBX CBS 010
35008167 12/2018
TBX: General overview
Catalog of TBX modular analog modules (IP20)
Catalog of modules
The following table presents the catalog of TBX modular analog modules (IP20).
Type of module
Illustration modular TBX analog modules
Channel types
Number of channels
Range
Isolation
Reference inputs
4
Multirange, V, I, TC,
Pt100 isolated inputs
TBX AES 400 outputs
2
Multirange, V, I isolated outputs
TBX ASS 200 inputs/outputs
6 inputs, 2 outputs
Multirange, V, I non-isolated inputs, isolated outputs
TBX AMS 620
Catalog of communication modules
The following table presents the catalog of communication and connection modules for analog base units (IP20).
Type of module
Illustration
Communication module for connecting to the analog base unit
Communication module on the analog base unit.
Connection module on the extension base unit.
Reference TBX LEP 030
35008167 12/2018
TBX CBS 010
49
TBX: General overview
Description of TBX module accessories Section 1.6
Description of TBX module accessories
Subject of this section
This section describes the accessories of TBX monobloc and modular (IP20) and dust and damp proof monobloc (IP65) modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Accessories of TBX IP20 modules
Accessories of TBX IP65 modules
Input simulators for discrete TBX (IP20) modules
Transistor output simulators for discrete TBX (IP20) modules
Page
50
35008167 12/2018
TBX: General overview
Accessories of TBX IP20 modules
Wiring accessories
To simplify wiring, the following accessories for wiring TBX IP20 distributed I/O modules are proposed:
A grounding strip connected to ground by the terminal, which enables all the protective screening for sensors and/or preactuators to be connected to the local ground.
This accessory is sold in lots of 5, reference TBX GND 015.
The quick installation of this strip, (fixed to terminals 2 and 40 on the terminal block) means that, although it is joined to the main terminal block, an additional connection level is formed. The assembly can still be removed.
In addition, a laterally fixed terminal is used to connect the local ground and the metallic parts of the product in order to provide permanent protection of the base units.
An inter-terminal connecting comb is used to connect together several terminals at the same voltage.
This accessory is sold in lots of 5, reference TBX RV 015.
They are designed so that 2 combs may be used in the same connection space, one on top of the other. They are perforated so they can be cut to the correct length by the user, and can be used for 2 to 9 terminals.
Insulation between the two combs installed one on top of the other is 2000 V AC.
The following drawing shows the wiring accessories for TBX IP20 modules.
35008167 12/2018
51
TBX: General overview
The following table provides the various wiring accessory elements for TBX IP20 modules.
4
5
2
3
Number
1
Description
Terminal block for wiring sensors, preactuators and power supplies.
Screw terminal.
TBX GND 015 Grounding strip.
TBX RV 015 inter-terminal connecting comb (to be cut as required).
For the Series 1000, a self-adhesive label, indicating the no. of channels from
16 to 31, can be stuck over the label already in place.
Input and transistor output simulators
Two 8 channel simulators are proposed to enable debugging and maintenance of distributed I/O modules:
a 24 V DC input simulator
( see page 54 ) , referenced TBX SEP 08.
a 24 V DC 0.5 A transistor output simulator ( see page 56 )
, referenced TBX SSP 08.
52
35008167 12/2018
TBX: General overview
Accessories of TBX IP65 modules
Wiring accessories
TBX IP65 dust and damp proof monobloc modules are supplied with blanking plugs in order to maintain the level of protection of the modules whenever all the channels are left unused.
A TBX BAS 10 power supply connector is provided. It provides the power supply to the preactuators connected to the outputs of the modules TBX ESP 08C22 and TBX ESP 1622.
The TSX BLP 10 is also available. (power supply for logical part of
and station addressing
).
35008167 12/2018
53
TBX: General overview
Input simulators for discrete TBX (IP20) modules
General
It is connected on 8 inputs of a discrete TBX IP20 module, and enables the following to be simulated:
either the presence of a sensor without leakage current (for example a dry contact or a 3-wire proximity sensor) or the presence of a sensor with leakage current (for example a 2-wire proximity sensor).
The green LEDs indicate the state of the sensor:
passive (open input), no leakage current, closed (input set to 24 V DC), with leakage current.
Connection
The input simulator is fixed directly to the screw terminal of the TBX module (terminals
( see page 133 ) I0 to I7, I8 to I15 or I/O8 to I/O15). The common wire (white) must be connected to
a +Cs, +Csm,n+1 or +C (24 V DC) terminal
.
To simulate all the TBX module inputs (I0 to I15), two input simulators are required:
one simulator connected at I0 to I7, and the second connected at I8 to I15.
NOTE: For TBX mixed modules, the input simulator is used with an output simulator.
Illustration
The following diagram shows the switches that can be used with input simulators.
54
35008167 12/2018
TBX: General overview
Description: SW2 in upper position
SW2 in upper position: simulates a sensor without leakage current.
SW1 in upper position: the sensor is passive and thus the input is open:
the LED is off
the TBX input is at state 0.
if the module has an input wiring check function, this indicates a fault.
SW1 in lower position: the sensor is active and thus the input is connected to the 24 V DC:
the LED is on
the TBX input is at state 1 the TBX module does not indicate a fault.
Description: SW2 in lower position
SW2 in lower position: simulates a sensor with leakage current (2-wire proximity sensor).
SW1 in upper position: the sensor is passive:
the LED is only faintly lit (leakage current),
the TBX input is at state 0 if the module has an input wiring check function, this indicates a fault.
SW1 in lower position: the sensor is active and thus the input is connected to the 24 V DC:
the LED is on
the TBX input is at state 1 the TBX module does not indicate a fault.
35008167 12/2018
55
TBX: General overview
Transistor output simulators for discrete TBX (IP20) modules
General
It is connected on 8 0.5 A transformer outputs of a discrete TBX IP20 module, and enables the following to be simulated:
either a short-circuit or the presence of a load (for modules with a wiring check function).
The red LEDs indicate the state of the outputs when simulating the presence of loads.
Connection
The transistor output simulator is fixed directly on the screw terminal of the TBX module (terminals
To simulate all the TBX module outputs (O0 to O15), two transistor output simulators are required:
one simulator connected at O0 to O7, and the second connected at O8 to O15.
NOTE: For TBX mixed modules, the transistor output simulator is used with an input simulator.
Illustration
The following diagram shows the switches that can be used with transistor output simulators.
56
35008167 12/2018
TBX: General overview
Description: SW2 in upper position
SW2 in upper position: no simulation of load present.
SW1 in upper position: output is not loaded:
the LED is off
if the module has an input wiring check function, this indicates a fault.
SW1 in lower position: there is a short-circuit on the output:
if the output is at "1", the LED is off and a short-circuit fault is signaled
if the output is at "0", the LED is off. If the module has an output wiring check function, no
"wiring check" fault is signaled.
Description: SW2 in lower position
SW2 in lower position: simulation of load present.
SW1 in upper position: output is loaded and these is no short-circuit:
if the output is at "0" and if the module has an output wiring check function, the LED is on but
only faintly. No wiring check fault is signaled.
if the output is at "0" and if the module does not have an output wiring check function , the
LED is off.
if the output is at "1" the LED is on.
SW1 in lower position: there is a short-circuit on the output:
if the output is at "1", the LED is off and a "short-circuit" fault is signaled
if the output is at "0", the LED is off. If the module has an output wiring check function, no
"wiring check" fault is signaled.
35008167 12/2018
57
TBX: General overview
58
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX: general installation rules
35008167 12/2018
General installation rules for TBX distributed input/output modules Chapter 2
General installation rules for TBX distributed input/output modules
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the general installation rules for TBX distributed input/output modules.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following sections:
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
Section
2.1
2.2
2.3
Operating conditions
Installation procedure
Installation rules
Module dimensions
Module labeling
Mounting and removing modules
Module power supply
Module connection
Module addressing
Base unit configuration
Topic
Page
35008167 12/2018
59
TBX: general installation rules
Operating conditions Section 2.1
Operating conditions
Subject of this section
This section presents the operating conditions for TBX IP20 and IP65 modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Standards : TBX IP20 modules
Environment, operating conditions and limits: TBX IP20 modules
Standards : TBX IP65 modules
Environment, operating conditions and limits: TBX IP65 modules
Page
60
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Standards : TBX IP20 modules
At a Glance
TBX IP20 distributed I/O interfaces have been developed to comply with the principal national and international standards relating to industrial electronic control devices:
specifications specific to PLCs (operating characteristics, immunity, ruggedness, safety):
NF C 63 850,
IEC 1131-2,
CSA 22.2 No. 142,
NEMA ICS 3.304,
UL 508.
immunity to electrostatic discharge:
IEC 801.2 level 4.
dielectric properties and self-extinguishing insulating materials:
UL 746C.
UL 94.
...
strict limitation on the degree of electromagnetic interference produced:
EN 55022,
NF C 91 022,
FCC Part 15,
VDE 871-877,
...
merchant navy specification:
BV,
DNV,
GL,
LROS,
RINA,
...
35008167 12/2018
61
TBX: general installation rules
Environment, operating conditions and limits: TBX IP20 modules
At a Glance
The following table shows the climatic environment as well as the operating conditions for the TBX
IP20 modules.
Climatic environment
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Humidity without condensation
Altitude
Protection index
Vibrations
Sinusoidal frequency along 3 axes
Amplitude
Acceleration
Mechanical impacts
Acceleration
Duration
Supply voltage
Nominal voltage
Operating range
Primary/secondary isolation
Maximum break time to module power supply
Maximum break time to sensor power supply
Maximum break time to preactuator power supply
0 °C to 60 °C (1)
-25 °C to 70 °C
5 to 95 %
0 to 2000 m
IP20
5 Hz 16 Hz 150 Hz
2 mm constant
2 G constant
15 g
11 ms
24VDC / 48VDC
19.2 to 30 V / 38.4 to 60 V
1500 VAC
10 ms
2 ms
1 ms
Key:
(1) At 60 °C, operates with up to 60 % of the inputs ON and/or 60 % of the outputs ON at nominal load (except for special temperature derating).
62
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Standards : TBX IP65 modules
At a Glance
TBX IP65 distributed I/O interfaces have been developed to comply with the principal national and international standards relating to industrial electronic control devices:
specifications specific to PLCs (operating characteristics, immunity, ruggedness, safety):
NF C 63 850,
IEC 1131-2,
immunity to electrostatic discharge:
IEC 801.2 level 4.
35008167 12/2018
63
TBX: general installation rules
Environment, operating conditions and limits: TBX IP65 modules
At a Glance
The following table shows the climatic environment as well as the operating conditions for the TBX
IP 65 modules.
Climatic environment
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Humidity without condensation
Altitude
Protection index
Vibrations
Sinusoidal frequency along 3 axes
Amplitude
Acceleration
Mechanical impacts
Acceleration
Duration
Supply voltage
Nominal voltage
Operating range
Primary/secondary isolation
Maximum break time to module power supply
Maximum break time to sensor power supply
Maximum break time to preactuator power supply
0 °C to 60 °C (1)
-25 °C to 70 °C
5 to 95 %
0 to 2000 m
IP65
5 Hz 16 Hz 150 Hz
2 mm constant
2 G constant
15 g
11 ms
24VDC
19.2 to 30 V
1500 VAC
10 ms
2 ms
1 ms
Key:
(1) At 60 °C, operates with up to 60 % of the inputs ON and/or 60 % of the outputs ON at nominal load (except for special temperature derating).
64
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Installation procedure Section 2.2
Installation procedure
Subject of this section
This section presents the installation procedure for TBX IP20 and IP65 modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Installing a TBX IP20 Module
Installing a TBX IP 65 Module
Page
35008167 12/2018
65
TBX: general installation rules
Installing a TBX IP20 Module
Installation Procedure
The following table describes the different stages of the installation procedure for a TBX IP20 module.
Step
1
2
3
4
7
8
5
6
Action
Attach the monobloc TBX or the modular base units onto the mounting plate or the DIN rail
Side by side: the fixing lugs determine the distance between the modules,
One above the other: the spacing between the modules must be between 4 and 5 cm, so that the devices are well ventilated.
Connect a yellow/green wire between the mounting plate (connected to ground) and the protective ground terminal on each TBX monobloc or base unit.
During the installation and the wiring procedure, the ventilation louvres on the modules are protected by cardboard which must be removed before switching the units on.
Attach the labels supplied with each TBX monobloc or modular base unit:
Fill out the Connection/Module label
TBX monobloc or base unit,
Lift the removable protective cover on the terminal block and then slide the label under this transparent cover
There is one label for each terminal block.
edge of the label indicates the direction of insertion.
Prepare the terminal blocks. Depending on the particular module and the wiring:
Screw in the grounding strip for taking the ground from screened cables
,
Wire up one or more wiring combs to facilitate wiring for relay base units and/or distribute currents in the commons for high current applications (the current in common terminals must not exceed 6 A).
Wire up the terminal block: power supplies and I/O.
In the case of a basic modular TBX, mount the communication module
( see page 89 ) . This is fixed to the base unit by 4 captive screws which perform
both a mechanical and electrical function by providing ground continuity.
Fill out a Connection/Module label
communication module.
( see page 83 ) and attach it to the
Code the Fipio address by correctly positioning the dip-switches ( see page 112 ) .
In the case of a modular TBX, position the cover and extension connection cable
66
35008167 12/2018
Step
9
10
TBX: general installation rules
Action
Switch on. To do this:
remove the pieces of cardboard which protect the modules during wiring.
Power up the modules. All the lights flash during the self-test phase of the communication module.
Following the self-test, the RUN LED is permanently on, and where there is no connection to the Fipio bus the DEF lamp flashes. The channel display lamps indicate channel status together with any faults (short-circuit or open circuit, etc.).
The I/O should be checked when the module is connected to the Fipio bus and when the bus is operational. The connection point configuration is sent automatically to the module from the PLC configuration.
Maintenance:
Power must beswitched off when making alterations to the configuration that
concern the branching devices or are on the inside of any devices,
Power must be switched off when connecting/disconnecting the Fipio bus to the PLC,
Only connecting/disconnecting the connectors to the Fipio bus can be performed while the module is powered up.
35008167 12/2018
67
TBX: general installation rules
Installing a TBX IP 65 Module
Installation Procedure
The following table describes the different stages of the installation procedure for a TBX IP 65 module.
Step
1
2
3
Action
Attach the TBX to its support.
Prepare the TBX BLP 10 connector (wiring). The installation is described in stages 3 to 9.
Presentation of the product.
68
35008167 12/2018
Step
4
Action
Remove the cable gland and pass the cable through it (take care to ensure that the chamfer on the metal ring is facing upwards). Strip the cable sheath to a length of 6 cm.
TBX: general installation rules
5 Fold back the shielding braid on the cable sheath; if necessary, undo the braid.
35008167 12/2018
69
TBX: general installation rules
Step
6
Action
Strip the conductors by 0.5 cm, and leave
1.5 cm of sleeve.
Hold the braid down on the cable sheath using adhesive tape.
7 It is preferable to use the wiring accessories (A) to connect the conductors.
There are two possible connection methods: by extension or tap-off.
Set the address using the switches
70
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Step
8
Action
Replace the card in the unit, then close the unit using the two screws. Remove the adhesive tape holding the braid and pass the metal ring under the braid. Check that the braid does not protrude beyond the cable gland (to ensure dust and damp proofing) and position the seal under the metal ring.
9 Tighten the cable gland nut to the tightening torque given at step 3.
10
11
12
Attach the TBX BLP 10 connector to the module and connect the green/yellow wire to the screw clamp on the TBX BLP 10.
Switch on.
All the lights flash during the self-test phase of the communication module. Following the self-test, the RUN
LED is permanently on, and where there is no connection to the Fipio bus the ERR lamp flashes. The channel display lamps indicate channel status together with any faults (short-circuit or open circuit, etc.).
The I/O should be checked when the module is connected to the Fipio bus and when the bus is operational.
The connection point configuration is sent automatically to the module from the PLC configuration.
Maintenance:
Power must beswitched off when making alterations to the configuration that concern the branching
devices or are on the inside of any devices,
Power must be switched off when connecting/disconnecting the Fipio bus to the PLC,
Only connecting/disconnecting the connectors to the Fipio bus can be performed while the module is powered up.
35008167 12/2018
71
TBX: general installation rules
Installation rules Section 2.3
Installation rules
Subject of this section
This section presents the installation rules for TBX IP20 and IP65 modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Arrangement of IP20 modules
Arrangement of IP65 modules
Connecting Modules
Page
72
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Arrangement of IP20 modules
IP20 modules
These TBX distributed I/O modules may be installed in a cabinet, in an enclosure as for electrical devices or in a protective box placed as close as possible to the sensors and preactuators.
They may be mounted side by side (horizontally or vertically) in which case the minimum space between two modules is determined by the fixing lugs. The maximum distance is determined by the length of the extension cable.
The following drawing shows horizontal side-by-side installation for the TBX IP20 modules.
The following drawing shows vertical side-by-side installation for the TBX IP20 modules.
35008167 12/2018
73
TBX: general installation rules
When they are mounted one above the other the spacing, which must be at least 4 to 5 cm, is determined by the length of the cable to the extension unit.
The following drawing shows TBX IP20 modules mounted one above the other.
d Spacing determined by the extension cable (4 to 5 cm min.).
74
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Arrangement of IP65 modules
IP65 modules
These TBX distributed I/O modules may be installed as close as possible to the sensors and preactuators.
They can be mounted either vertically or horizontally on supports (mounting plate, beam, etc.) with a minimum width of 8 cm.
The following drawing shows horizontal or vertical installation for the TBX IP65 modules.
35008167 12/2018
75
TBX: general installation rules
Connecting Modules
General
The various TBX remote I/O devices are connected to each other and to the PLC by daisy chaining or tap links, over the Fipio field bus.
A Fipio bus segment (which can be up to 1000 meters in length) provides 32 connection points to which 31 TBX devices may be connected (one connection point at address 0 is reserved for the
PLC).
The use of repeaters enables up to 15 bus segments to be connected together, so that TBX devices can be connected over a maximum distance of 15000 meters.
Using several bus segments gives a maximum of 64 connection points. Thus it is possible to connect 62 modular or Discrete (IP65) TBX modules, (in addition to point 0 reserved for PLC connection, and point 63 which is used to connect a terminal).
IP20 Modules
The following drawing shows the connection between TBX IP20 modules and the PLC via a single
Fipio bus segment.
The following drawing shows the connection between TBX IP20 modules and the PLC via several
Fipio bus segments.
76
1 Fipio bus segment (15 x 1000 m segments maximum).
2 Repeater (14 maximum).
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
IP65 Modules
The following drawing shows the connection between TBX IP65 modules and the PLC via a single
Fipio bus segment.
3 TBX FP ACC10 branch box.
The following drawing shows the connection between TBX IP65 and IP20 modules and the PLC via several Fipio bus segments.
d1 Maximum length of the 24 VDC drop and power cable. Cable reference number:
TSX FP CF100,TSX FP CF200,TSX FP CF500.
2 Repeater (14 maximum).
3 TBX FP ACC10 branch box.
35008167 12/2018
77
TBX: general installation rules
Module dimensions Section 2.4
Module dimensions
Subject of this section
This section presents the dimensions for TBX IP20 and IP65 modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Monobloc or modular TBX modules (IP20)
Dust and damp proof monobloc TBX modules (IP65)
Power supply module TBX SUP 10
Page
78
35008167 12/2018
Monobloc or modular TBX modules (IP20)
Dimensions
The following drawing shows the dimensions of a TBX IP20 module.
TBX: general installation rules
35008167 12/2018
79
TBX: general installation rules
Dust and damp proof monobloc TBX modules (IP65)
Dimensions: input modules
The following drawing shows the dimensions of a TBX IP65 input module.
Dimensions: output modules
The following drawing shows the dimensions of a TBX IP65 output module.
80
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Power supply module TBX SUP 10
Dimensions
The following drawing shows the dimensions of a TBX SUP 10 power supply module.
35008167 12/2018
81
TBX: general installation rules
Module labeling Section 2.5
Module labeling
Subject of this section
This section presents labeling for TBX IP20 and IP65 modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Attaching the Connection/Module label
Attaching the terminal label
Page
82
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Attaching the Connection/Module label
Attaching to the monobloc TBX
To simplify maintenance, complete the Connection/Module label as follows:
Co. = connection point address on the Fipio bus: 1 to 31,
Mod. = module number: always 0.
Attach the information label to the module in the space provided:
35008167 12/2018
83
TBX: general installation rules
Attaching to the modular TBX
To simplify maintenance, complete the Connection/Module label as follows:
Co. = connection point address on the Fipio bus: 1 to 127,
Mod. = module number : 0 for the base unit and 1 for the extension.
Attach the information label to the space provided on the communication module, on the cover of the extension module or on the base unit:
84
NOTE: for dust and damp proof TBX modules (IP65), the label should be placed on the Fipio cable where it enters the TBX BLP 10 connector.
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Attaching the terminal label
General
To ensure that the terminal labels can be read easily, whatever the position of the TBX module, a two-part label is provided with each monobloc or modular TBX base unit.
The following drawing shows the position of the terminal label.
Installation procedure
The following table shows the procedure to follow for attaching the terminal label.
Stage
1
2
3
4
5
Action
Cut out the correct part of the terminal label: label 1 for terminal 1, for clear marking. (The TBX diagrams on the edges of the label indicate which part to use, according to the position of the module).
Complete the terminal label if necessary: connection point address and module number, label for each of the channels.
Raise the removable protective cover.
Slide the terminal label inside the protective cover, being careful to position it behind the 4 tabs which will hold the label in place. The terminal labels can be read through the protective cover: label 1 is positioned opposite terminal 1, etc.
Close the protective cover over the terminal and push the two ends firmly into place. Any information that it was perhaps necessary to add to the label will then be visible through the cover.
35008167 12/2018
85
TBX: general installation rules
Mounting and removing modules Section 2.6
Mounting and removing modules
Subject of this section
This section presents mounting and removal of TBX IP20 and IP65 modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Mounting the modules on Telequick mounting plate or DIN rail
Mounting a communication module on a base unit
Mounting the cover and the connection cable on an extension base unit
Connecting the extension module to the base module
Mounting/Removing the Terminal Block
Page
86
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Mounting the modules on Telequick mounting plate or DIN rail
General
Monobloc TBX modules, modular TBX base units and the TBX SUP 10 power supply may be mounted on a Telequick mounting plate, or on a DIN rail (profile):
the modules are fixed to the mounting plate using 3 screws of diameter 4, in the fixing lugs, fixing onto a DIN rail does not require any accessories.
NOTE: mounting on a Telequick mounting plate is recommended for installations where there is considerable vibration.
Whatever type of mounting is used, the installation instructions specific to TBX modules should be followed
Mounting
The following drawing shows mounting on a Telequick mounting plate.
1 AM1-PA mounting plate.
35008167 12/2018
87
TBX: general installation rules
The following drawing shows mounting on DIN rail.
1 Combination rail width 35 mm AM1-ED200.
2 Omega rail width 35 mm AM1-DE200.
WARNING
UNEXPECTED SYSTEM BEHAVIOR - ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCES
To ensure correct operation of TBX modules in strong electromagnetic environments, they must be mounted on metal supports which are correctly connected to ground. The base and the extension modules of a modular TBX should be mounted on the same plate, on the same mounting DIN rail or on DIN rails which are connected by a metal cross-piece.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
88
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Mounting a communication module on a base unit
General
The following drawing shows the mounting phase for the communication module on a TBX base unit.
35008167 12/2018
89
TBX: general installation rules
Mounting procedure
The following table describes the mounting procedure for the communication module on a base unit.
Stage
1
2
Action
Once the Connection/Module labels are in place
, fit the communication module on the base unit making sure that the female connector on the base unit is in line with the male connector, located underneath the communication module.
Secure the communication module to the base unit using 4 fixing screws.
90
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Mounting the cover and the connection cable on an extension base unit
General
The following drawing shows the phase of mounting the cover and the connection cable on an extension base unit.
35008167 12/2018
91
TBX: general installation rules
Mounting procedure
The following table describes the procedure of mounting the cover and the connection cable on an extension base unit.
Stage
1
2
3
Action
Plug in the connection cable connector to the base unit.
Once the Connection/Module labels are in place
, fit the communication module on the base unit making sure that the female connector on the base unit is in line with the connection cable connector in the slot on the edge of the cover.
Secure the communication module to the base unit using 4 fixing screws.
92
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Connecting the extension module to the base module
General
The following drawing shows the phase of connecting the extension module to the base module.
Mounting procedure
The following table describes the procedure of connecting the extension module to the base module.
Stage
1
2
3
4
Action
Raise the access cover to the extension connection.
Remove the cap in the access cover to the connector, which clears the passage for the connection cable.
Plug in the free connector of the connection cable (connector on the cable extension) to the female connector on the communication module.
Close the cover to allow the connection cable to pass through.
35008167 12/2018
93
TBX: general installation rules
Mounting/Removing the Terminal Block
General
The following drawing shows the mounting/removing phase for the terminal block.
Removal Procedure
The following table describes the procedure for removing the terminal block.
Step
1
Action
To remove the terminal block, simultaneously pull the two extractors on each side of the terminal block, indicated by arrows on the drawing.
Mounting Procedure
The following table describes the procedure for mounting the terminal block.
Step
1
Action
To replace the terminal block, place it in its position and press on each side of the closed protective cover, snapping it into place. The two extractors, which were in the open position, then close.
DANGER
ELECTRIC SHOCK
Always turn off the power before mounting, removing or replacing the terminal block.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
94
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Module power supply Section 2.7
Module power supply
Subject of this section
This section presents the separate external power supplies and the behavior of the TBX IP20 and
IP65 modules on power cut and power return.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
TBX IP20 module power supplies
TBX IP65 module power supplies
Behavior on power cut and power return of the TBX IP20 modules
Behavior on power cut and power return of the TBX IP65 modules
TBX module power consumption table
Calculation sheet
Page
35008167 12/2018
95
TBX: general installation rules
TBX IP20 module power supplies
General
Distributed I/O modules require a direct power supply via a 24 V voltage source (or 48 V for certain modular TBXs). In order to best overcome the various constraints linked to the power sources, modules have separate power inputs to supply the:
communication circuits and I/O interface (module power supply), the sensors, the preactuators.
NOTE: the advantage of using separate external power supplies is that it is possible to cut the input or output supply without cutting the supply to the communication module.
Power supplies
The following table shows the number of separate power supplies available by I/O type.
Type of module
Discrete inputs
Transistor outputs
Number of separate power supplies
2 module power supply
2 input power supply module power supply
Discrete inputs and transistor outputs 3 output power supply module power supply input power supply output power supply
Discrete inputs and programmable
I/O
Relay outputs
Discrete inputs and relay outputs
2
1
2 module power supply input and programmable I/O power supply module power supply module power supply input power supply
NOTE: relay outputs are powered by the +-SV module supply.
The 0 of the external power supplies (-SV, -IS, -OS, -S) must be common.
96
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
TBX IP65 module power supplies
General
Remote I/O TBX IP65 modules require a 24 VDC voltage supply. This supplies the:
Communication circuits and I/O interface (module power supply),
Sensors,
The TBX IP65 module power supply is provided by the TBX BLP 10.
The following drawing shows the wiring board of the TBX BLP 10.
Output modules require an additional power supply which provides energy required for the preactuators.
NOTE: The advantage of using separate external power supplies is that it is possible to cut the output supply without cutting the supply to the communication module.
Power Supplies
The following table shows the number of separate power supplies available by I/O type.
Type of module
Discrete inputs
Static outputs
Number of separate power supplies
1 Module and input power supply
2 Module power supply
Output power supply (1)
Key:
(1) In order to avoid serious damage during a polarity inversion of the output power supply, the following must be protected:
The TBX ESP 08C22 module by a 6 A fast-acting
fuse,
The TBX ESP 1622 module by a 9 A fast-acting fuse,
35008167 12/2018
97
TBX: general installation rules
Behavior on power cut and power return of the TBX IP20 modules
General
The following diagram describes the behavior on power cut and power return of the TBX IP20 modules.
Tc Time duration of power cut to power supplies (voltage < 14 V).
Tr Time duration of power return to power supplies (voltage > 19.2 V).
WARNING
UNEXPECTED SYSTEM BEHAVIOR
In order to ensure correct operation of an extension module on power cut and power return, it must have the same SV power supply as its base module. If this is not the case: a 24 V SV base and a 48 V extension (or vice versa) correct operation on power cut and power return is not assured.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
SV module power supply voltage
If the power cut to the modules is less than 10 ms, it will not cause a fault in the module.
A break greater than 10 ms can cause the module to stop and therefore reconfigure on return of power.
The voltage supplied to the module is not monitored by the TBX.
98
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
IS sensors power supply voltage
If the power cut to the modules is greater than 2 ms, the voltage monitoring system detects this fault before the fastest input is set to 0, (except for the TBX DES 16F22 module that has an input filtering time of 1 ms).
Similarly, when the supply voltage exceeds 19.2 V, the voltage monitoring system waits for 16 ms before signaling this, so as to be able to set the slowest input (except for modules that have an input wiring check whose filtering time is 35 ms).
This combination enables the coherence of input values to be assured, when no power supply fault to the sensors is signaled.
A break in the power supply to the sensors will not cause any internal fault to the module.
OS preactuators power supply voltage
If power to the preactuators is cut for more than 1 ms, voltage monitoring detects this fault and sets the outputs to 0.
When the power supply voltage exceeds 19.2 V, the voltage monitoring system waits for 16 ms before signaling and validating the outputs again.
A break in the power supply to the preactuators will not cause any internal fault to the module.
35008167 12/2018
99
TBX: general installation rules
Behavior on power cut and power return of the TBX IP65 modules
General
The following diagram describes the behavior on power cut and power return of the TBX IP65 modules.
Tc Time duration of power cut to power supplies (voltage < 14 V).
Tr Time duration of power return to power supplies (voltage > 19.2 V).
Module power supply voltage
If the power cut to the modules is less than 10 ms, it will not cause a fault in the module.
A break greater than 10 ms can cause the module to stop and therefore reconfigure on return of power.
The voltage supplied to the module is not monitored by the TBX.
If power to the module is cut for more than 2 ms, voltage monitoring detects this fault before the fastest input is set to 0.
Similarly, when the supply voltage exceeds 19.2 V, the voltage monitoring system waits for 16 ms before signaling this, so as to be able to set the slowest input.
This then ensures coherent input values if no power supply fault is detected.
Preactuators power supply voltage
If power to the preactuators is cut for more than 1 ms, voltage monitoring detects this fault and sets the outputs to 0.
When the power supply voltage once more exceeds 19.2 V, the voltage monitoring system waits for 16 ms before signaling and validating the outputs again.
A break in the power supply to the preactuators will not cause any internal fault to the module.
100
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
TBX module power consumption table
Power consumption table
The following table shows the power consumption table for the TBX modules.
Module part (1)
If base module on +SV base
70 mA -
If extension module on +SV base
on +SV ext.
-
Sensor part
If base module or extension module on +S or +IS
on S, +OS or preact. supply
TBX LEP 020 (2) with a 24 V supply
TBX LEP 030 (2) with a 24 V supply
70 mA -
TBX CEP 1622
TBX CSP 1622
TBX CSP 1625
TBX EEP 08C22
TBX ESP 08C22
TBX EEP 1622
TBX ESP 1622
TBX DES 1622
TBX DES 16C22
TBX DES 16F22
TBX DES 1633
TBX DMS 16C22
TBX DMS 16P22
TBX DMS 16C222
TBX DMS 1025
TBX DMS 1625
TBX DSS 1622
TBX DSS 16C22
TBX DSS 1625
TBX DSS 1235 (2)
TBX DES 16S04
TBX DMS 16S44
40 mA
40 mA
20 mA
40 mA
30 mA
45 mA
35 mA
80 mA
90 mA
100 mA
195 mA
190 mA
107 mA
240 mA
107 mA
20 mA
30 mA
30 mA
125 mA
130 mA
60 mA
60 mA
-
-
-
-
negligible negligible negligible
10 mA
10 mA negligible
10 mA negligible
10 mA
10 mA
10 mA negligible negligible negligible negligible negligible negligible
30 mA
30 mA
16 mA
30 mA
25 mA
35 mA
25 mA
70 mA
-
-
-
-
-
107 mA
107 mA
15 mA
25 mA
25 mA
115 mA
125 mA
55 mA
55 mA
-
-
-
-
70 mA
75 mA
70 mA
70 mA
70 mA
35 mA
75 mA
35 mA
75 mA
75 mA
-
-
-
70 mA
-
-
-
150 mA
-
35 mA (3)
-
120 mA (4)
98 mA (3)
208 mA (5)
-
51 mA (3)
-
-
-
25 mA (3)
-
-
100 mA
25 mA (3)
-
-
-
-
35 mA (3)
45 mA (3)
35008167 12/2018
101
TBX: general installation rules
Module part (1)
If base module on +SV base
130 mA
180 mA
224 mA
If extension module on +SV base on +SV ext.
negligible
15 mA
59 mA
130 mA
162 mA
162 mA
TBX AES 400
TBX ASS 200
TBX AMS 620
Key:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
-
-
-
Sensor part
If base module or extension module on +S or +IS
-
-
on S, +OS or preact. supply
These consumptions correspond to a typical a 24 V module power supply, with a 60 % loading (except for TBX DES 1633 which is supplied with a 48 V V).
With a 48 V power supply, divide the values by 2.
Module consumption, loads not included.
Leakage current/sensor 15 mA max.
Leakage current/sensor 13 mA max.
102
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Calculation sheet
Example
The following example illustrates use of a calculation sheet for consumptions of the TBX modules.
Fipio address
Example: 1
Module
Base
TBX LEP 020 70
TBX DES 16C22 40
Extension
TBX DMS 16C22 10
Consumption on SV (mA) Consumption on IS or S
(mA)
Base Extension
0
0
30
...
70
35
Consumption on OS or S
(mA)
Module
...
0
25
Load
...
0 x
Total
Total (mA)
70
110
100 + x
280 + x
Fipio address
Module
...
Base
...
...
Extension
...
...
...
...
Consumption on SV (mA) Consumption on IS or S
(mA)
Base Extension
Consumption on OS or S
(mA)
Module Load
Total (mA)
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Total
...
...
...
...
Total of sheet ...
35008167 12/2018
103
TBX: general installation rules
Module connection Section 2.8
Module connection
Subject of this section
This section presents connection of TBX IP20 and IP65 modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Wiring TBX modules and sensors/preactuators
Connecting discrete module power supplies (IP20)
Connecting discrete module power supplies (IP65)
Page
104
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Wiring TBX modules and sensors/preactuators
Connecting the modules to ground (IP20)
The fixing lugs for the monobloc or modular TBX base units have a metallic plate connected to the functional ground of the module. This connection ensures the TBX modules function correctly provided modules are mounted on metal supports which are correctly connected to ground.
Basic modules and extension modules must be mounted on the same support or on supports which are correctly connected to each other.
The following drawing shows how to connect TBX IP20 modules to ground.
DANGER
ELECTRIC SHOCK
Connect the terminal S of the module to the protective ground by a yellow/green wire.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Connecting the modules to ground (IP65)
The TBX IP65 module is connected to ground using a TBX BLP 10 connector for the
TBX EEP 08C22/EEP 1622 input modules.
This is done in the same way as for the TBX ESP 08C22/EEP 1622 output modules and via the grounding wire entering via the TBX BAS 10 connector which powers the preactuators.
35008167 12/2018
105
TBX: general installation rules
Connecting the sensors and/or preactuators to ground (IP20).
The grounding strip, reference TBX GND 015, is fixed to the ground terminals 2 and 40 of the module which allows the protective screening of the sensors and/or preactuators to be connected.
NOTE: it should be noted that this ground connection is not made when the terminal block is disconnected.
The following drawing shows how the sensors and/or preactuators (1P20) are grounded.
Connecting the sensors and/or preactuators to ground (IP65).
The sensors and preactuators (IP65) are connected to ground via terminal 5 of the M12 I/O connectors.
Cable size
The terminals on TBX modules provide a cable size of:
1 x 1.5 mm cable end,
2 x 1 mm
2 maximum cable with cable end or 2.5 mm
2 maximum flexible cable with cable end.
2 maximum (0.2 mm 2 minimum) without
However, in order to make wiring easier and to increase accessibility, it is advisable to use a 1 mm flexible cable with a molded cable end (reference: DZ5-CE 010).
2
106
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Connecting discrete module power supplies (IP20)
General
There are several types of power supply which may be connected to monobloc TBXs or to modular
TBX base units:
"SV" power supply for the module, common to all modules,
"IS" power supply for sensors, for modules containing inputs (excluding TBX DMS 16P22),
"OS" power supply for preactuators, for modules containing outputs (excluding
TBX DMS 16P22),
"S" power supply for sensors and preactuators, for the TBX DMS 16P22 module (8 inputs and
8 programmable I/O).
NOTE: If there is only one external power supply, the + terminals for the SV, IS, OS and S power supplies can be connected together.
However, it is essential that the - terminals for these power supplies be connected together.
The advantage of using separate external power supplies is that it is possible to cut the input or output supply without cutting the supply to the communication module.
Module power supply SV
This supplies the communication modules (base module SV ) and the I/O control circuits.
This supply is isolated up to 1500 Vrms from ground.
The nominal voltage applied to terminals SV+ and SV- should be the same as the supply voltage for the I/O. For example:
for a 24 V input base unit, the SV supply is a 24 V, for a 48 V input base unit, the SV supply is a 48 V,
For modules with relay outputs, SV supplies the coils of these relay outputs.
Sensor power supply IS
If the TBX module does not have a wiring check function, the IS power supply is distributed on the
Cs terminals of the terminal block, to enable the sensors to be wired (intermediate wiring blocks are no longer required).
This IS power supply is continuously monitored to enable the inputs to be processed coherently, during a power break or power return filtering).
( see page 98 ) (except for TBX DES 16F22 used with fast
For modular TBX modules with a wiring check function, the IS supply is distributed on the Csn,n+1 terminals of the terminal block via current limiters, which enables the current to be limited on the line, should a short circuit occur in the application.
Each +Csn,n+1 ( 0,1 A max. current) or +Cs (unprotected) sensor power terminal can supply two sensors.
35008167 12/2018
107
TBX: general installation rules
Preactuator power supply OS
The OS supply is continuously monitored at the 0.5 A and 2 A transistor outputs and then distributed on the CA terminals of the connection block used for wiring the preactuators
(intermediate connection blocks are not required).
Monitoring the voltage enables the outputs to be processed coherently when a power break or
power return occurs ( see page 98 )
.
Each 0 V (-CA) terminal wires 2 preactuators.
For 2 Amp transistor output modules, a wiring comb must be used, reference TBX RV 015, to connect the + terminals together (terminals +OSn,n+1) and to avoid excessive currents in the card.
"S" power supply for sensors and preactuators
The S sensor and preactuator power supply (TBX DMS 16P22) is distributed on the C terminals of the terminal block, for wiring the sensors and preactuators (intermediate wiring blocks are no longer required).
Monitoring this voltage enables the inputs and outputs to be processed coherently
NOTE: Supply voltages generated by rectifying/filtering the AC supply should not exceed 30 V.
108
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Connecting discrete module power supplies (IP65)
General
There are several types of power supply which may connected to dust and damp proof monobloc
TBXs:
power supply for the modules, sensors and preactuators, output power supply.
Wiring for modules and sensors/preactuators
The power supply for modules, sensors and preactuators is provided by the drop and power cable.
(cable reference: TSX FP CF100,TSX FP CF200,TSX FP CF500).
Output power supply
This power supply is provided via the TBX BAS 10 connector.
35008167 12/2018
109
TBX: general installation rules
Module addressing Section 2.9
Module addressing
Subject of this section
This section presents addressing for TBX IP20 and IP65 modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Addressing principle
Coding Addresses
Page
110
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Addressing principle
Principle
For a device connected to a Fipio bus to be operational:
it must be configured in the programming workshop, for the PLC station containing the processor with the Fipio link.
This operation consists of defining the family of equipment (TBX, ATV, etc.) as well as the type of equipment connected (communication module, base units and extension, etc.) for each of the
Fipio bus connection points.
Connection point addresses 0 and 63, reserved for the PLC and the programming terminal respectively, should not be configured, the address of the equipment itself (1 to 127) must be defined by: setting the dip-switches for the TBX modules
.
NOTE: Particular attention must be paid when addressing devices, as each number is unique and corresponds to the logical configuration.
35008167 12/2018
111
TBX: general installation rules
Coding Addresses
General
The address is coded on dip-switches situated above the connector, which are used to connect to the Fipio bus. These dip-switches, of which there are 8, enable binary coding within the limits given below:
Type of processor Max no. of TBX addresses
TBX addresses
IP20 monobloc
TSX P57 154
TSX P57 •54
TSX PCI 57 •54
62
127
1 to 31
1 to 31
IP20 modular
IP65 monobloc
1 to 62
1 to 62, 64 to 127
WARNING
UNEXPECTED SYSTEM BEHAVIOR
Do check the addresses of the devices to ensure:
That the connection point number of the device on the Fipio bus is unique,
That this number corresponds to the number in the configuration.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
TBX Monobloc IP20
Addressing a TBX Discrete monobloc IP20 device (31 devices maximum per architecture).
The following diagram shows the coding of the device at address 15.
NOTE: As the 3 most important dip-switches (on the left) are inactive, their position is not important.
112
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
TBX Monobloc IP65
Coding the Fipio address for the TBX IP65.
Starting up the TBX only requires the address of the devices to be coded using the switches inside the TBX BLP 10 (numbered from 1 to 99 inclusive) according to the following diagram:
The following table shows examples of various possible addresses on the rows of micro-contacts:
Least significant switch Value
1
Most significant switch Value
16
2
3
32
48
Example: To obtain address 37 (5 + 32), the micro-contacts should be coded as follows:
35008167 12/2018
113
TBX: general installation rules
Modular TBX
Addressing a modular TBX device (126 devices maximum per architecture).
The following diagram shows the coding of the device at address 62.
114
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Base unit configuration Section 2.10
Base unit configuration
Subject of this section
This section presents the configuration for TBX TOR IP20 and IP65 base units.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Configuring IP65 discrete base units (leakage current)
Access to dip-switches SW1 and SW2 (IP20 discrete base units)
Configuring dip-switch SW1 (IP20 discrete base units)
Configuring dip-switch SW2 (IP20 discrete base units)
Page
35008167 12/2018
115
TBX: general installation rules
Configuring IP65 discrete base units (leakage current)
General
NOTE: The sensor has a leakage current of between 0.45 mA and 1 mA.
116
35008167 12/2018
TBX: general installation rules
Access to dip-switches SW1 and SW2 (IP20 discrete base units)
General
The following drawing shows the location of the dip--switches SW1 and SW2 on TBX discrete IP20 base units.
Procedure to follow
The following table describes the procedure for accessing the dip-switches SW1 and SW2 located on the electronic board.
Stage
1
2
Action
Unplug the terminal block from the base unit ( see page 94 ) .
Open the access hatch on the electronic board, pivoting it towards the back
(opposite side to the terminal block).
35008167 12/2018
117
TBX: general installation rules
Configuring dip-switch SW1 (IP20 discrete base units)
Configuration
The dip-switch SW1 enables regulation of the leakage current according to the sensor used:
Leakage current (natural or induced)
The sensor has a leakage current between 0.45 mA and 1 mA.
The sensor has a leakage current between 1 mA and 1.8 mA.
SW1 position
ON
OFF
The following table shows the different possibilities.
Type of sensor
2 wire proximity sensor with leakage current between
0.45 mA and 1 mA.
SW1 External adaptation Illustration
ON No adaptation.
2-wire proximity sensor with leakage current between
1 mA and 1.8 mA.
OFF No adaptation.
Limit switch reference XCM-
A1102 P2A.
OFF No adaptation
(Limit switch 2 fitted with 15 kΩ resistor connected to the open contact.).
118
35008167 12/2018
Type of sensor
Limit switch reference XCK-
J161••• fitted with a
ZCK-J82A module.
SW1 External adaptation Illustration
OFF No adaptation.
TBX: general installation rules
Volt free contact or
3 wire proximity sensor with induced leakage current between 0.45 mA and 1 mA.
Volt free contact or
3 wire proximity sensor with induced leakage current between 1 mA and
1.8 mA.
ON Installation of a
33 kΩ +-5 % resistor in parallel with the 24 V sensor terminals.
OFF Installation of a
15 kΩ +-5 % resistor in parallel with the 24 V sensor terminals.
NOTE: the permissible open line resistance is:
500 kΩ with SW1 in the ON position,
200 kΩ with SW1 in the OFF position,
NOTE: for each of the channels, the wiring check function may or may not be enabled, which makes it possible to use sensors both with and without a leakage current.
35008167 12/2018
119
TBX: general installation rules
Configuring dip-switch SW2 (IP20 discrete base units)
Configuration
The dip-switch SW2 enables regulation of the input filtering time:
Filter
5 ms fast filter
35 ms normal filter
SW2 position
ON
OFF
NOTE: when replacing a base unit which is configured with input wiring check on site, do not forget to configure SW1 and SW2 on the new base unit, before restarting the application.
The respective positions of SW1 and SW2 determine the maximum length permitted between the wiring check modules and the sensors.
SW1 in the ON position:
Max. length without 50 Hz coupling
Max. length (240 VAC coupling)
Max. length (24 VAC coupling)
SW2 ON
500m
10 m
100 m
SW2 OFF
500 m
200 m
500 m
SW1 in the OFF position:
Max. length without 50 Hz coupling
Max. length (240 VAC coupling)
Max. length (24 VAC coupling)
SW2 ON
500 m
35 m
350 m
SW2 OFF
500 m
200 m
500 m
120
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX: fault processing
35008167 12/2018
Processing faults in TBX distributed I/O modules Chapter 3
Processing faults in TBX distributed I/O modules
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the processing of hardware faults related to TBX distributed I/O modules.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following sections:
Section
3.1
3.2
Description of the indicator lamps
Fault-finding
Topic Page
35008167 12/2018
121
TBX: fault processing
Description of the indicator lamps Section 3.1
Description of the indicator lamps
Subject of this section
This section provides the description of the TBX IP20 and IP65 module indicator lamps.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Description of the Discrete TBX IP20 Indicator Lamps
Description of the discrete TBX IP65 indicator lamps
Page
122
35008167 12/2018
TBX: fault processing
Description of the Discrete TBX IP20 Indicator Lamps
General
Each remote I/O TBX IP20 module has a display block which indicates its state and the state of its channels.
Description
The following drawing shows the display block for the TBX IP20 modules.
The following table describes the state of the lamps:
LEDs
RUN
(green)
Permanently on
Device operational.
DEF (red) Device faulty.
COM
(yellow)
-
-
Blinking
I/O (red) Wiring fault or sensors/preactuators are faulty (short-circuit, open circuit, no voltage).
0 to 15
(red)
Channel is active.
-
Fipio link fault.
Indicates that a Fipio frame has been sent or received.
Wire fault on the wiring check modules: open circuit (indicated by flashing lamp) or shortcircuit (indicated by inverted flashing lamp).
-
-
-
-
Off
Channel is inactive.
NOTE: On a TBX monobloc, only the first 16 lamps are used.
35008167 12/2018
123
TBX: fault processing
Description of the discrete TBX IP65 indicator lamps
General
Each TBX distributed I/O IP65 module has display LEDs which indicate the state of the module and its channels.
Description
The following drawing shows the display LEDs for the TBX IP65 8 channel modules. The status lamp for each channel is next to the corresponding connection point.
The following drawing shows the display LEDs for the TBX IP65 16 channel modules.
124
The following table describes the state of the lamps:
Lamps
RUN
(green)
Steady light
Device operational.
ERR (red) Faulty device.
COM
(yellow)
-
-
Flashing
Fipio link fault.
Shows whether a Fipio frame is being transmitted or received.
-
-
-
Off
35008167 12/2018
TBX: fault processing
Lamps Steady light
I/O (red) Wiring fault or sensors/preactuators are faulty (short-circuit, open circuit, no voltage).
0 to 15 Channel is active.
-
Flashing
Wire fault on the wiring check modules: open circuit (indicated by flashing lamp) or shortcircuit (indicated by inverted flashing lamp).
-
Off
Channel is inactive.
NOTE: the indicator lamps on 16 channel 1P65 modules are 2 different colors:
even channels are associated with yellow lamps,
odd channels are associated with green lamps.
35008167 12/2018
125
TBX: fault processing
Fault-finding Section 3.2
Fault-finding
Subject of this section
This section describes fault-finding using the TBX indicator lamps.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Displaying common faults
Displaying faults in discrete TBX modules
Displaying faults in TBX analog modules
Page
126
35008167 12/2018
TBX: fault processing
Displaying common faults
Description
The following table shows the operation of the display lamps for the TBX distributed I/O modules.
Lamps Lit Flashing Off
RUN
(green)
DEF (1)
(red)
I/O
(red)
Device operational.
-
Internal fault in the module or lack of power supply to base unit no. 2 or insufficient power supply voltage.
External fault.
The type of fault depends on the distributed I/O module chosen:
discrete
analog
-
Fipio link fault.
Device switched off
No fault.
No external fault.
Key:
(1) ERR on the discrete IP65 TBXs.
NOTE: when a TBX is being connected to the Fipio, if all 4 lamps RUN, DEF (ERR on the discrete
IP65 TBXs), COM and I/O flash simultaneously, this indicates that the connection point address defined for this TBX is already being used by another TBX, connected to the bus.
In this case, modify the connection point address code.
Remedial actions
The following table describes the remedial actions to be taken when faults are indicated.
Lamps Lit Flashing Off
RUN
(green)
-
check the fuse, check the terminal block connection, check the module supply voltage.
35008167 12/2018
127
TBX: fault processing
Lamps
DEF (1)
(red)
I/O
(red)
Lit Flashing
check the connection of the
TBX BLP 01 (IP20) or
TBX BLP 10 (IP65) connector.
check configuration of the module in the software workshop.
The type of fault depends on the distributed I/O module chosen:
discrete analog
,
-
check to see whether the voltage is ≥ 19.4 V. If correct:
modular TBX: change the
communication module or the base unit, monobloc TBX: change the module, check the power supply of base unit no. 2.
-
-
Key:
(1) ERR on the discrete IP65 TBXs.
Off
128
35008167 12/2018
TBX: fault processing
Displaying faults in discrete TBX modules
Description
The following table shows the operation of the display lamps for the TBX distributed I/O modules.
Lamps Lit Flashing Off
I/O
(red)
Channel
0 to 15
(red)
External fault:
short-circuit on outputs,
open circuit on inputs, if wiring check module, sensor/preactuator voltage failure.
Channel is active
-
Wire fault on the wiring check modules: open circuit (indicated by flashing lamp) or short-circuit
(indicated by inverted flashing lamp).
No external fault.
Channel is inactive.
Remedial actions
The following table describes the remedial actions to be taken when faults are indicated.
Lamps Lit Flashing Off
I/O
(red)
Channel
0 to 15
(red)
-
Check the cabling.
-
check the tightness of the terminals, check the sensor or the preactuator.
-
-
35008167 12/2018
129
TBX: fault processing
Displaying faults in TBX analog modules
Description
The following drawing shows the display block indicator lamps for the TBX analog modules.
Lamps
The following table shows the operation of the display lamps for the TBX distributed I/O modules.
Lit Flashing Off
COM
(yellow)
I/O (1)
(red)
Channel
0 to 3 (2)
(red)
-
Shows whether a Fipio frame is being transmitted or received.
Wiring or sensor/preactuator fault:
short-circuit, open circuit, no voltage.
-
-
-
Fault in the associated channel.
A channel fault is detected if there is a fault on the sensor link.
-
No external fault.
130
35008167 12/2018
Lamps
Channel
0 to 15
(red)
-
Key:
(1)
(2)
Lit Flashing
When all lamps (0 to 15) are flashing (some may be displayed as a steady light), it means that an internal fault has been detected. If this is the case, the module must be changed.
Note: if an internal fault occurs on the extension, check that this extension has been properly connected and powered.
-
Lamp not used for the TBX ASS 200 and TBX AMS 620 modules.
Only on the TBX AES 400 module.
TBX: fault processing
Off
35008167 12/2018
131
TBX: fault processing
132
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX: meaning of terminals
35008167 12/2018
Meaning of terminals of TBX distributed input/output modules Chapter 4
Meaning of terminals of TBX distributed input/output modules
Meaning of terminals
Description
The following table provides the definition of discrete TBX module terminals (IP20).
+IS
-IS
NC
N1
Terminal Comment
+C TBX DMS 16P22 modules only.
This terminal, connected internally to +S (+24 V DC) serves as the common for
2 sensors. It is not protected against short-circuits.
+C TBX DMS 16P22 modules only.
This terminal, connected internally to +S (0 V DC) serves as the common for
2 preactuators.
+CA
-CA
Cn, n+1
+Cs
This terminal, connected internally to +Os (a +24 V), is not protected against shortcircuits.
This terminal, connected internally to -Os (0 V DC) serves as the common for
2 preactuators.
On relay output modules, this terminal serves as the common for 2 relays.
-Cs
+Csn, n+1
This terminal, connected internally to +Is (a +24 V DC or a +48 V DC), serves as the common for 2 sensors. It is not protected against short-circuits.
This terminal, connected internally to -Is (0 V), serves as the common for two 3-wire proximity sensors.
Only for modules with wiring check function. This terminal, which supplies a +24 V DC protected against short-circuits, serves as the common for 2 sensors. It comes from +Is
(+24 V DC).
In
I/On
On S
+OS
Input.
TBX DMS 16P22 modules only.
This terminal can be configured as an Input or an Output.
+ input supply terminal: +24 V DC or +48 V DC
- input supply terminal: 0 V.
Voltage free terminal: Not Connected.
The two N1 terminals are connected together internally. They only exist on modules with
12 or 16 relay outputs.
Output
+ output supply terminal: +24 V DC
35008167 12/2018
133
TBX: meaning of terminals
Terminal Comment
-OS - output supply terminal: 0 V.
+Osn, n+1
+S
TBX DMS 16C222 modules only.
This terminal supplies two 2A transistor outputs with +24 V DC.
TBX DMS 16P22 modules only.
+ input and I/O supply terminal: +24 V DC.
-S
+SV
-SV
TBX DMS 16P22 modules only.
- input and I/O supply terminal: 0 V.
+ module supply terminal: +24 V DC or +48 V DC. This powers the communication module and the I/O interface of the base or extension module.
- module supply terminal: 0 V. This powers the communication module and the I/O interface of the base or extension module.
134
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX CEP 1622
35008167 12/2018
The TBX CEP 1622 distributed input module Chapter 5
The TBX CEP 1622 distributed input module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX CEP 1622 module, its characteristics and the terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX CEP 1622 module
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX CEP 1622
Connecting the module TBX CEP 1622
Page
35008167 12/2018
135
TBX CEP 1622
Introduction to the TBX CEP 1622 module
General
TheTBX CEP 1622 distributed input module is a monobloc module comprising 16 24 V DC inputs, compatible with 2 and 3 wire proximity sensors.
It has a terminal block for direct wiring of the sensors.
The sensor voltage is monitored to ensure that there is sufficient voltage for the inputs.
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX CEP 1622
Nominal voltage +SV 24 V DC
Supply voltage +SV 19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
Current drawn on +SV
Current drawn on +IS
(loading = 60 % of inputs ON)
Power dissipated in the module
(loading = 60 % of inputs ON)
Dielectric strength between inputs and ground (GND)
Isolation resistance
90 mA typically at 24 V
70 mA typically at 24 V
3,9 W at 24 V
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Protection against a reverse polarity on SV Yes: diode in series
Key:
SV
IS
Power supply to module (communication module and input interfaces).
Power supply to sensors.
136
35008167 12/2018
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX CEP 1622
General characteristics
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX CEP 1622:
Module TBX CEP 1622
Nominal voltage IS
Nominal current
Sensor power supply IS
Voltage for ON state
Current at 11 V
Voltage for ON state
Current for OFF state
Input impedance at 24 V
Switch-on time
Switch-off time
24 V DC
7 mA
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
> 7 V
≥ 2 mA
< 5 V
≤ 1.4 mA
3,4 kΩ
5 to 11 ms
5 to 13 ms
Permitted line resistance (2 wire proximity sensor) 100 Ω
Permitted line resistance (volt-free contact)
Permitted leakage resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
500 Ω
200 Ω
Permitted leakage resistance (volt-free contact)
IEC standard 1131
Compatibility with Telemecanique 2 wire proximity sensors
Compatibility with CENELEC 3 wire proximity sensors
50 Ω
Type 1
Yes
Yes
Compatible with TBX transistor outputs
Type of input
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel at state 1
Protection against a reverse polarity on IS
Yes
Resistive
Positive
0,17 W
Yes: reverse diode in parallel (ext. fuse
2 A (quick blow))
TBX CEP 1622
Key:
IS Power supply to sensors.
35008167 12/2018
137
TBX CEP 1622
Connecting the module TBX CEP 1622
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a resistive input.
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 18 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 14 V.
138
35008167 12/2018
Terminal block wiring
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
TBX CEP 1622
NOTE: A 2 A quick blow fuse, wired to the sensor power supply IS is needed against short-circuits concerning the +Cs
.
It is not necessary to connect the two +IS terminals together, nor the two -IS terminals. The -SV terminal and a -IS (0 V) terminal must however be connected together.
35008167 12/2018
139
TBX CEP 1622
140
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX CSP 1622
35008167 12/2018
The TBX CSP 1622 distributed output module Chapter 6
The TBX CSP 1622 distributed output module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX CSP 1622 module, its characteristics and the terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX CSP 1622 module
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX CSP 1622
Connecting the module TBX CSP 1622
Page
35008167 12/2018
141
TBX CSP 1622
Introduction to the TBX CSP 1622 module
General
The TBX CSP 1622 distributed output module is a monobloc module comprising 16 24 V DC 0.5 A transistor outputs.
It has a terminal block for direct wiring of the pre-actuators.
The outputs are protected
( see page 324 ) against overloads and short-circuits.
When there is a fault at an output, the I/O indicator lamp lights and the output is set to state 0. To reactivate it, this output must be reset once the fault has been rectified.
The preactuator voltage is monitored to ensure coherent processing of the outputs during variations in the power supply.
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX CSP 1622
Nominal voltage +SV
Supply voltage +SV
Current drawn on +SV
24 V DC
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
100 mA typically at 24 V
Current drawn on +OS
(with no active outputs)
Power dissipated in the module
(loading = 60 % of active outputs)
35 mA typically at 24 V
5,7 W at 24 V
Dielectric strength between outputs and ground (GND)
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Isolation resistance > 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Protection against a reverse polarity on SV Yes: diode in series
Key:
SV
OS
Power supply to module (communication module and output interfaces).
Power supply to pre-actuators..
142
35008167 12/2018
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX CSP 1622
General characteristics
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX CSP 1622:
Module TBX CSP 1622
Nominal voltage IS
Nominal current
OS supply voltage limits
Permitted filament lamp power
Leakage current at OFF state
Residual voltage at ON state
Switching time at ON or OFF state
Load impedance at ON state
Outputs protected against overloads
Outputs protected against overvoltages
Protection against a reverse polarity on OS
Detection of break in load
Conforms to IEC 1131
Compatible with DC inputs
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel at ON state
Protection against a reverse polarity on IS
24 V DC
0,5 A
19.2 to 30 VDC
8 W
< 0,5 mA
< 0,4 V
≤ 1 ms
> 50 Ω
Yes: thermal
Yes: Zener diode
Yes : reverse diode in parallel (ext. fuse
12 A (quick blow))
No
Yes
Yes
Positive
0,35 W
Yes: reverse diode in parallel (ext. fuse
2 A (quick blow))
TBX CSP 1622
Key:
OS Power supply to pre-actuators.
35008167 12/2018
143
TBX CSP 1622
Connecting the module TBX CSP 1622
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a 24 V 0.5 A transistor output.
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 18 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 14 V.
144
35008167 12/2018
Terminal block wiring
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
TBX CSP 1622
NOTE: the two +OS terminals ( see page 133 ) must be wired together as well as the two -OS
terminals. The -SV terminal and a -OS (0 V) terminal must also be wired together.
35008167 12/2018
145
TBX CSP 1622
146
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX CSP 1625
35008167 12/2018
The TBX CSP 1625 distributed output module Chapter 7
The TBX CSP 1625 distributed output module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX CSP 1625 module, its characteristics and the terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX CSP 1625 module
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX CSP 1625
Connecting the module TBX CSP 1625
Page
35008167 12/2018
147
TBX CSP 1625
Introduction to the TBX CSP 1625 module
General
The TBX CSP 1625 distributed output module is a monobloc module comprising 16 50 VA relay outputs.
It has a terminal block for direct wiring of the pre-actuators.
When a fault appears at an output, it is set to state 0.
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX CSP 1625
Nominal voltage +SV
Supply voltage +SV
Current drawn on +SV
(with 60 % of the relays active)
Immunity to +SV microbreaks
(with 60 % of the relays active)
24 V DC
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
195 mA typically at 24 V
10 ms
Power dissipated at nominal load in the module
(with 60 % of the relays active)
Dielectric strength between outputs and ground (GND)
4,7 W at 24 V
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Isolation resistance > 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Protection against a reverse polarity on SV Yes: diode in series
Key:
SV Power supply to module (communication module and output interfaces).
148
35008167 12/2018
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX CSP 1625
General characteristics
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX CSP 1625:
Module TBX CSP 1625
Operating voltage
Permitted DC current DC12 resistive loads
19 to 30 V DC, 24 to 264 V AC
24 W 0.2 x 10 6 operations
Permitted DC current DC13 inductive loads
(L/R = 60 ms)
Permitted AC current AC12 resistive loads
10 W 10 6 operations
1 A - 110/220 V 0.2 x 10
0,5 A - 110/220 V 2 x 10
1 A -24/48 V 0.5 x 10
6
6
6 operations operations operations
2 A - 24 V 0,2 x 10 6 operations
Permitted AC current AC15 resistive loads 50 VA - 110/220 V 10
10 VA -48/220 V 10 7
6 operations
0,5 A - 110/220 V 2 x 10
1 A - 24 V 0,2 x 10 6
6 operations operations operations
30 A peak 50 operations Accidental power breaks (opening due to inrush current of the contactor)
Thermal current (1)
Switch-on response time
Switch-off response time
Dielectric strength of contacts
3 A
10 ms max.
20 ms max.
2000 V rms.
Compatible with DC inputs Yes
Preactuators protected against overvoltages No internal protection (2)
Protection against short-circuits and overloads
No internal protection
TBX CSP 1625
35008167 12/2018
149
TBX CSP 1625
Common per channel
Type of contact
Key:
(1)
(2)
1 for 2 channels
Normally open
Maximum value of current which can cross the contact without damaging it. This value, which is associated with the relay, should not be confused with the permissible current, relating to the module. The permissible current takes into account the breaking capacity of the relay
(maximum switching current) and the characteristics of the other components which constitute the output.
With an inductive load on an AC supply, an RC or GMOV peak limiter circuit must be wired across the load. For DC, wire a reverse mounted diode in parallel to the load.
150
35008167 12/2018
TBX CSP 1625
Connecting the module TBX CSP 1625
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram of a relay output (normally open contacts).
Terminal block wiring
The illustration below provides an example of a wiring diagram: The module outputs organized into two groups by the user have separate power supplies (outputs 0 to 9, outputs 10 and 11 and outputs 12 to 15).
The NC terminals
TBX RV 015.
are not wired within the modules, but are used to distribute the power supply neutral to the various loads. For this purpose, use connecting combs, reference
A connecting comb is also used to connect the relay commons (C0,1, C2,3,...) with the supply phase.
35008167 12/2018
151
TBX CSP 1625
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
152
NOTE: The two N1 terminals
( see page 133 ) are connected together internally.
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX EEP 08C22
35008167 12/2018
The TBX EEP 08C22 distributed input module Chapter 8
The TBX EEP 08C22 distributed input module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX EEP 08C22 module, its characteristics and the terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX EEP 08C22 module
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX EEP 08C22
Connecting the module TBX EEP 08C22
Page
35008167 12/2018
153
TBX EEP 08C22
Introduction to the TBX EEP 08C22 module
General
The TBX EEP 08C22 dust and damp proof distributed input module is a monobloc module comprising 8 24 V DC inputs, compatible with 2 and 3 wire proximity sensors.
It is equipped with M12 type connectors for direct wiring of the sensors.
The sensor voltage is monitored to ensure that there is sufficient voltage for the inputs to operate correctly.
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX EEP 08C22
Nominal voltage
Supply voltage
Current drawn at +24 V
Current drawn at +24 V
(loading = 60 % of inputs ON)
Power dissipated in the module
(loading = 60 % of inputs ON)
24 V DC
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
135 mA typical at 24 V (8 channels at 0)
190 mA typically at 24 V
5,2 W at 24 V
Dielectric strength between inputs and ground (GND)
1500 V DC for 1 min
Isolation resistance > 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Protection against a reverse polarity on +24 V Yes: diodes in series
Key:
SV Power supply to module (communication module and output interfaces).
154
35008167 12/2018
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX EEP 08C22
General characteristics
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX EEP 08C22:
Module TBX EEP 08C22
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
Sensor power supply
Voltage for ON state
Current at 11 V
Voltage for OFF state
Current for OFF state
Input impedance at 24 V
Switch-on time
Switch-off time
24 V DC
6 mA
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
≥ 11 V
≥ 5 mA
< 6 V
≤ 2 mA
3,4 kΩ
5 to 8.5 ms
5 to 8.5 ms
Permitted line resistance (2 wire proximity sensor) 100 Ω
Permitted line resistance (volt-free contact)
IEC standard 1131
500 Ω
Type 2
Compatibility with Telemecanique 2 wire proximity sensors
Compatibility with CENELEC 3 wire proximity sensors
Yes
Yes (leakage current ≥ 1 mA)
Compatible with TBX transistor outputs
Type of input
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel at state 1
Protection of 4 signal terminals against overload or short-citcuit
Protection per diode against a reverse polarity on
+24 V
Yes
Current sink
Positive
0,17 W
Yes
Yes
TBX EEP 08C22
35008167 12/2018
155
TBX EEP 08C22
Connections
The following table illustrates channel connection for module TBX EEP 08C22
Illustration
Type M12 female connector (one per channel).
4
5
2
3
Terminal
1
Description
+24 V (supplied by module) not connected
0 V (supplied by module) sensor signal ground connection
156
35008167 12/2018
Connecting the module TBX EEP 08C22
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a wiring check input.
TBX EEP 08C22
1 Resistance R for a dry contact or a 3-wire proximity sensor, enables the input wiring check to be used.
2 Power supply to the sensors is provided via the module.
35008167 12/2018
157
TBX EEP 08C22
Wiring the input connectors
The following illustration shows the wiring diagram for input connectors.
158
NOTE: the module is powered by cable TBX FP CB100.
WARNING
SHORT CIRCUIT - LOSS OF PROOF
Do place the blanking plugs on slots where channels are not in use (tightening torque of cable glands: 1 Nm), in order to retain the IP65 dust and damp proof protection.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX ESP 08C22
35008167 12/2018
The TBX ESP 08C22 distributed output module Chapter 9
The TBX ESP 08C22 distributed output module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX ESP 08C22 module, its characteristics and the wiring of output connectors.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX ESP 08C22 Module
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX ESP 08C22
Connecting the TBX ESP 08C22 Module
Page
35008167 12/2018
159
TBX ESP 08C22
Introduction to the TBX ESP 08C22 Module
General
The TBX ESP 08C22 sealed (IP65) remote output module is a monobloc module comprising 8
24 VDC, 0.5 A static outputs.
It is equipped with M12-type connectors for direct wiring of the pre-actuators.
The outputs are protected
( see page 324 ) against overloads and short-circuits.
When there is a fault at an output, the I/O indicator lamp lights and the output is set to state 0. To reactivate it, this output must be reset once the fault has been rectified.
The preactuator voltage is monitored to ensure consistent processing of the outputs during variations in the power supply.
Technical Specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX ESP 08C22
Nominal voltage
Supply voltage
Current drawn at +24 V (1)
24 VDC
19.2 to 30 VDC
107 mA typically at 24 V
Current drawn at +24 V (2)
(with no active outputs)
Power dissipated in the module
(loading = 60 % of active outputs)
120 mA typically at 24 V
4.1 W at 24 V
Dielectric strength between outputs and ground
(GND)
1500 VDC for 1 min
Isolation resistance > 10 MΩ below 500 VDC
Protection against a reverse polarity on +24 V (1) Yes: diodes in series (3)
R on
outputs 1006 Ω max
Key:
(1)
(2)
(3)
Power supply to module (communication and output interfaces).
Power supply to preactuators.
Only when the module 24V and the pre-actuator 24V are isolated.
160
35008167 12/2018
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX ESP 08C22
General characteristics
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX ESP 08C22:
Module TBX ESP 08C22
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
OS supply voltage limits
Permitted filament lamp power
Leakage current at OFF state
Residual voltage at ON state
Switching time at ON or OFF state
Load impedance at ON state
Outputs protected against overloads
Sensor power supply protected against overvoltages
Protection against reverse polarity on preactuator power supply
Detection of break in load
Conforms to IEC 1131
Compatible with DC inputs
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel when ON
24 V DC
0,5 A
19.2 to 30 VDC
8 W
< 2 mA
< 0,4 V
≤ 1 ms
> 50 Ω
< 3 kΩ
Yes: thermal
Yes: Zener diode
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Positive
0,25 W
TBX ESP 08C22
Connections
The following table illustrates channel connection for module TBX ESP 08C22
Illustration
Type M12 female connector (one per channel).
4
5
2
3
Terminal
1
Description
+24 V (supplied by module) not connected
0 V (supplied by module) preactuator signal ground connection
35008167 12/2018
161
TBX ESP 08C22
Connecting the TBX ESP 08C22 Module
Circuit Diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a 24 V 0.5 A static output.
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 18 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 14 V.
2 This power supply is provided via the TBX BAS 10 connector.
162
35008167 12/2018
Wiring of Output Connections
The following is an illustration of the wiring diagram for output connectors.
TBX ESP 08C22
NOTE: The module is powered by cable TBX FP CB100.
The following table provides the maximum permitted current per module.
Number of channels
8 direct channels
6 direct channels
2 amplified channels
7 direct channels
1 amplified channel
Maximum output current per module
8 x 0.5 A = 4 A
6 x 0.5 A + 2 x 1 A = 5 A
7 x 0.5 A + 1 x 2 A = 5.5 A
WARNING
SHORT CIRCUIT - LOSS OF PROOF
Do place the blanking plugs on slots where channels are not in use in order to retain the IP65 dust and damp proof protection.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
35008167 12/2018
163
TBX ESP 08C22
Wiring the TBX BAS 10 Connector
The following illustration shows the different parts of the TBX BAS 10 connector.
5
6
7
A screw terminal block is used to connect the cable (diameter between 7.5 and 10 mm). The following table provides installation details.
3
4
Step
1
2
Action
Strip the cable back up to a maximum of 2 cm.
Mount the connector as follows:
Assemble parts A, B, C and D, tighten part D without forcing it,
Place part E over part H.
Feed the cable through the part which has been assembled (cable gland).
Attach the wires to the terminals of the second part (+ on terminal 1, - on terminal 3, protective ground on terminal 4).
Caution: if the 24V module supply and 24V preactuator supply are not isolated, a reversion of polarity may destroy the module.
Place part F over part H.
Attach the cable in the cable clamp F, using part G and the two screws provided.
Fit both parts of the connector together and tighten the cable gland D.
164
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX EEP 1622
35008167 12/2018
The TBX EEP 1622 distributed input module Chapter 10
The TBX EEP 1622 distributed input module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX EEP 1622 module, its characteristics and the wiring of its input connectors.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX EEP 1622 module
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX EEP 1622
Connecting the module TBX EEP 1622
Page
35008167 12/2018
165
TBX EEP 1622
Introduction to the TBX EEP 1622 module
General
The TBX EEP 1622 dust and damp proof distributed input module (IP65) is a monobloc module comprising 16 24 V DC inputs, compatible with 2 and 3 wire proximity sensors.
It is equipped with M12 type connectors for direct wiring of the sensors.
The sensor voltage is monitored to ensure that there is sufficient voltage for the inputs to operate correctly.
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX EEP 1622
Nominal voltage
Supply voltage
Current drawn at +24 V
Current drawn at +24 V
(loading = 60 % of inputs ON)
Power dissipated in the module
(loading = 60 % of inputs ON)
24 V DC
19.2 V DC to 30 V DC
95 mA typical at 24 V (16 channels at 0)
240 mA typically at 24 V
4 W at 24 V
Dielectric strength between outputs and ground (GND)
1500 V DC for 1 min
Isolation resistance > 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Protection against a reverse polarity on +24 V Yes: diodes in series
166
35008167 12/2018
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX EEP 1622
General characteristics
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX EEP 1622:
Module TBX EEP 1622
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
Sensor power supply
Voltage for ON state
Current at 11 V
Voltage for ON state
Current for OFF state
Input impedance at 24 V
Switch-on time
Switch-off time
24 V DC
7 mA
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
≥ 7 V
≥ 2 mA
< 5 V
≤ 1.4 mA
3,4 kΩ
5 to 11 ms
5 to 13 ms
Permitted line resistance (2 wire proximity sensor) 100 Ω
Permitted line resistance (volt-free contact)
IEC standard 1131
500 Ω
Type 1
Compatibility with Telemecanique 2 wire proximity sensors
Compatibility with CENELEC 3 wire proximity sensors
Yes
Yes
Compatible with TBX transistor outputs
Type of input
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel at ON state
Yes
Resistive
Positive
0,17 W
TBX EEP 1622
35008167 12/2018
167
TBX EEP 1622
Connections
The following table illustrates channel connection for module TBX EEP 1622
Illustration
Type M12 female connector (one per two channels).
3
4
Terminal
1
2
5
Description
+24 V (supplied by module) sensor signal, green LED (odd channel 1, 3, ..., 15)
0 V (supplied by module) sensor signal, yellow LED
(even channel 0, 2, ..., 14) ground connection
168
35008167 12/2018
Connecting the module TBX EEP 1622
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a resistive input.
TBX EEP 1622
1 Power supply to the sensors is provided via the module.
35008167 12/2018
169
TBX EEP 1622
Wiring the input connectors
The following illustration shows the wiring diagram for input connectors.
170
NOTE: the module is powered by cable TBX FP CB100.
WARNING
SHORT CIRCUIT - LOSS OF PROOF
Do place the blanking plugs on slots where channels are not in use in order to retain the IP65 dust and damp proof protection.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX ESP 1622
35008167 12/2018
The TBX ESP 1622 distributed output module Chapter 11
The TBX ESP 1622 distributed output module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX ESP 1622 module, its characteristics and the wiring of its output connectors.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX ESP 1622 Module
Characteristics of the TBX ESP 1622 Module Outputs
Connecting the TBX ESP 1622 Module
Page
35008167 12/2018
171
TBX ESP 1622
Introduction to the TBX ESP 1622 Module
General
The TBX ESP 1622 sealed (IP65) remote output module is a monobloc module comprising
16 24 VDC 0.5 A transistor outputs.
It is equipped with M12-type connectors for direct wiring of the pre-actuators.
The outputs are protected
( see page 324 ) against overloads and short-circuits.
When there is a fault at an output, the I/O indicator lamp lights and the output is set to state 0. To reactivate it, this output must be reset once the fault has been rectified.
The preactuator voltage is monitored to ensure consistent processing of the outputs during variations in the power supply.
Technical Specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX ESP 1622
Nominal voltage
Supply voltage
Current drawn at +24 V (1)
24 VDC
19.2 to 30 VDC
107 mA typically at 24 V
Current drawn at +24 V (2)
(with no active outputs)
Power dissipated in the module
(loading = 60 % of active outputs)
51 mA typically at 24 V
4.3 W at 24 V
Dielectric strength between outputs and ground
(GND)
1500 VDC for 1 min
Isolation resistance > 10 MΩ below 500 VDC
Protection against a reverse polarity on +24 V (1) Yes, via diode in series (3)
Key:
(1)
(2)
(3)
Power supply to module (communication and output interfaces).
Power supply to preactuators.
Only when the module 24V and the pre-actuator
24V are isolated.
172
35008167 12/2018
TBX ESP 1622
Characteristics of the TBX ESP 1622 Module Outputs
General characteristics
This table presents the characteristics of the TBX ESP 1622 module outputs:
Module TBX ESP 1622
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
OS supply voltage limits
Permitted filament lamp power
Leakage current at OFF state
Residual voltage at ON state
Switching time at ON or OFF state
Load impedance at ON state
Outputs protected against overloads
Sensor power supply protected against overvoltages
Protection against reverse polarity on preactuator power supply
Detection of break in load
Conforms to IEC 1131
Compatible with DC inputs
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel when ON
24 VDC
0.5 A
19.2 to 30 VDC
8 W
< 2 mA
< 0.4 V
≤ 1 ms
> 50 Ω
< 3 kΩ
Yes: thermal
Yes, by Zener diode
Yes, by reverse diode (9A fast external fuse) (1)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Positive
0.05 W
Legend:
(1) Only when the module 24V and the pre-actuator 24V are isolated, and on condition that a quick-blow 9A fuse is placed on the preactuator + 24V.
35008167 12/2018
173
TBX ESP 1622
Connections
The following table illustrates channel connection for module TBX ESP 1622
Illustration
Type M12 female connector (one per two channels).
3
4
Terminal
1
2
5
Description
+24 V (supplied by the module)
Preactuator signal, green
LEDs (odd channel 1, 3, ..., 15)
0 V (supplied by the module)
Preactuator signal, yellow LED
(even channel 0, 2, ..., 14)
Ground connection
174
35008167 12/2018
Connecting the TBX ESP 1622 Module
Circuit Diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a 24 V 0.5 A static output.
TBX ESP 1622
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 18 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 14 V.
2 This power supply is provided via the TBX BAS 10 connector.
35008167 12/2018
175
TBX ESP 1622
Wiring of Output Connections
The following is an illustration of the wiring diagram for output connectors.
176
NOTE: The module is powered by cable TBX FP CB100.
WARNING
SHORT CIRCUIT - LOSS OF PROOF
Do place the blanking plugs on slots where channels are not in use in order to retain the IP65 dust and damp proof protection.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
35008167 12/2018
Wiring the TBX BAS 10 Connector
The following illustration shows the different parts of the TBX BAS 10 connector.
TBX ESP 1622
A screw terminal block is used to connect the cable (diameter between 7.5 and 10 mm). The following table provides installation details.
5
6
3
4
Step
1
2
7
Action
Strip the cable back up to a maximum of 2 cm.
Mount the connector as follows:
Assemble parts A, B, C and D, tighten part D without forcing it,
Place part E over part H.
Feed the cable through the part which has been assembled (cable gland).
Attach the wires to the terminals of the second part (+ on terminal 1, - on terminal 3, protective ground on terminal 4).
Caution: if the 24V module supply and 24V preactuator supply are not isolated, a reversion of polarity may destroy the module.
Place part F over part H.
Attach the cable in the cable clamp F, using part G and the two screws provided.
Fit both parts of the connector together and tighten the cable gland D.
35008167 12/2018
177
TBX ESP 1622
178
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX DES 1622
35008167 12/2018
The TBX DES 1622 distributed input module Chapter 12
The TBX DES 1622 distributed input module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX DES 1622 module, its characteristics and the terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX DES 1622 module
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 1622
Connecting the module TBX DES 1622
Page
35008167 12/2018
179
Key:
SV
IS
(1)
(2)
TBX DES 1622
Introduction to the TBX DES 1622 module
General
The TBX DES 1622 distributed input module is a modular base unit comprising 16 24 V DC inputs, compatible with 2 and 3 wire proximity sensors. The module is equipped with a terminal block for direct wiring of the sensors, which can be removed when it is switched off.
The sensor voltage is monitored to ensure that there is sufficient voltage for the inputs to operate correctly.
The inputs of this module have functions tasks in the application.
( see page 320 ) which, in certain cases, are common to a
group of channels. Thus, it is possible to assign the 2 channel groups of the module to the various
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX DES 1622
Nominal voltage +SV
Supply voltage +SV
Current drawn on +SV of the base module (at
24 V) (1) if basic unit if extension base unit
Current drawn at +SV by extension module (at 24 V)
Current drawn at +IS (at 24 V)
(loading = 60 % of inputs ON)
Power dissipated in the base unit (2)
(loading = 60 % of inputs ON)
Dielectric strength between inputs and ground (GND)
Isolation resistance
24 V DC
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
20 mA typically negligible
15 mA typically
150 mA typically
4,1 W at 24 V
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Power supply to module (communication module if present and input interfaces).
Power supply to sensors.
Current drawn on +SV by the communication module of the base unit:
70 mA (at 24 V).
Power dissipated in the communication module of the base: 1,7 W at
24 V
180
35008167 12/2018
TBX DES 1622
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 1622
General characteristics
This table presents the characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 1622:
Module TBX DES 1622
Nominal voltage IS
Current at 24 V
Sensor power supply IS
Voltage for ON state
Current at 11 V
Voltage for OFF state
Current for OFF state
Input impedance
Switch-on time
Switch-off time
Permitted line resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted line resistance (volt-free contact)
24 V DC
15 mA
19.2 V DC to 30 V DC
≥ 11 V
≥ 6 mA
< 5 V
≤ 2 mA
1.6 kΩ
7 to 15.5 ms
7 to 15.5 ms
100 Ω
500 Ω
Permitted leakage resistance (2 wire proximity sensor) > 100 kΩ
Permitted leakage resistance (volt-free contact)
IEC standard 1131
Compatibility with Telemecanique 2 wire proximity sensors
> 30 kΩ
Type 2
Yes
Compatibility with CENELEC 3 wire proximity sensors Yes
Compatible with TBX transistor outputs Yes
Type of input
Type of logic
Resistive
Positive
Power dissipated per channel at ON state
Protection of +C terminals against overload or shortcircuit
Protection against a reverse polarity on IS
0,36 W
No
Yes: reverse diode in parallel (ext. fuse 2 A
(quick blow))
Key:
IS Power supply to sensors.
35008167 12/2018
181
TBX DES 1622
Connecting the module TBX DES 1622
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a resistive input.
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 18 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 14 V.
182
35008167 12/2018
Terminal block wiring
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
TBX DES 1622
NOTE: the Cs ( see page 133 ) terminals are not protected against short-circuits, so a 2 A quick
blow fuse, must be wired to the sensor power supply IS.
It is not necessary to connect the two +IS terminals together, nor the two -IS terminals. The -SV terminal and a -IS (0 V) terminal must however be connected together.
35008167 12/2018
183
TBX DES 1622
184
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX DES 16C22
35008167 12/2018
The TBX DES 16C22 distributed input module Chapter 13
The TBX DES 16C22 distributed input module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX DES 16C22 module, its characteristics and the terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX DES 16C22 module
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 16C22
Connecting the module TBX DES 16C22
Page
35008167 12/2018
185
TBX DES 16C22
Introduction to the TBX DES 16C22 module
General
The TBX DES 16C22 module is a modular base unit comprising 16 24 V DC inputs, compatible with 2 and 3 wire proximity sensors. The module is equipped with a terminal block for direct wiring of the sensors, which can be removed when it is switched off.
The sensor voltage is monitored to ensure that there is sufficient voltage for the inputs to operate correctly.
The inputs of this module have functions tasks in the application.
( see page 320 ) which, in certain cases, are common to a
group of channels. Thus, it is possible to assign the 2 channel groups of the module to the various
Specific function
The wiring check function ( see page 328 ) in this base unit continuously checks the quality of the
connection to the sensors and detects the two main faults in a discrete input module:
loosening of the terminal screws or disconnecting a wire, and short-circuits to the cable ground.
Wiring check faults are diagnosed for each channel and cause the input to be set to 0.
environment.
( see page 115 ) , on the board, enable the channels to be adapted to their
186
35008167 12/2018
Key:
SV
IS
(1)
(2)
TBX DES 16C22
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX DES 16C22
Nominal voltage +SV
Supply voltage +SV
Current drawn on +SV of the base module (at
24 V) (1) if basic unit if extension base unit
Current drawn at +SV by extension module (at 24 V)
Current drawn at +IS (at 24 V)
(loading = 60 % of inputs ON)
Power dissipated in the base unit (2)
(loading = 60 % of inputs ON)
Dielectric strength between inputs and ground (GND)
Isolation resistance
24 V DC
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
40 mA typically
10 mA typically
30 mA typically
70 mA typically
2,6 W at 24 V
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Power supply to module (communication module if present and input interfaces).
Power supply to sensors.
Current drawn on +SV by the communication module of the base unit:
70 mA (at 24 V).
Power dissipated in the communication module of the base: 1,7 W at
24 V
35008167 12/2018
187
TBX DES 16C22
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 16C22
General characteristics
This table presents the characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 16C22:
Module TBX DES 16C22
Nominal voltage IS
Current at 24 V
Sensor power supply IS
Voltage for ON state
Current at 11 V
Voltage for OFF state
Current for OFF state
Input impedance
Switch-on time
Switch-off time fast filtering slow filtering fast filtering slow filtering
Permitted line resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted line resistance (volt-free contact)
Permitted leakage resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted leakage resistance (volt-free contact)
IEC standard 1131
Compatibility with Telemecanique 2 wire proximity sensors
Compatibility with CENELEC 3 wire proximity sensors
Compatible with TBX transistor outputs
Type of input
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel at ON state
24 V DC
7 mA
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
≥ 11 V
≥ 6 mA
< 5 V
≤ 2 mA
3,4 kΩ
5 to 8.5 ms
30 to 45 ms
5 to 8.5 ms
30 to 45 ms
100 Ω
500 Ω
(1)
(1)
Type 2
Yes
Yes (2)
Yes
Current sink
Positive
0,17 W
188
35008167 12/2018
TBX DES 16C22
Key:
IS
(1)
(2)
Module TBX DES 16C22
Protection of +C terminals against overload or short-circuit
Protection against a reverse polarity on IS
Yes
Yes: reverse diode in parallel (ext. fuse 2 A
(quick blow))
Power supply to sensors.
Permitted leakage resistance values are not
included in this table ( see page 115 )
.
With a standard 3 wire proximity sensor, with a
resistor in parallel ( see page 115 )
, the open circuit fault corresponds to a break in the input/proximity sensor link, or in the +power supply (+Cs) of the
3 wire proximity sensor.
Note: the break in the - power supply to the proximity sensor (-Cs) is not detected.
35008167 12/2018
189
TBX DES 16C22
Connecting the module TBX DES 16C22
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a wiring check input.
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 18 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 14 V.
2 Resistance R for a dry contact or a 3-wire proximity sensor, enables the input wiring check to be used.
190
35008167 12/2018
Terminal block wiring
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
TBX DES 16C22
NOTE: a quick blow 2 A fuse, must be wired to the sensor power supply IS.
It is not necessary to connect the two +IS terminals
together, nor the two -IS terminals. The -SV terminal and a -IS (0 V) terminal must however be connected together.
35008167 12/2018
191
TBX DES 16C22
192
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX DES 16F22
35008167 12/2018
The TBX DES 16F22 distributed input module Chapter 14
The TBX DES 16F22 distributed input module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX DES 16F22 module, its characteristics and the terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX DES 16F22 module
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 16F22
Connecting the module TBX DES 16F22
Page
35008167 12/2018
193
TBX DES 16F22
Introduction to the TBX DES 16F22 module
General
The TBX DES 16F22 module is a modular base unit comprising 16 24 V DC inputs, compatible with 2 and 3 wire proximity sensors. The module is equipped with a terminal block for direct wiring of the sensors, which can be removed when it is switched off.
The sensor voltage is monitored to ensure that there is sufficient voltage for the inputs to operate correctly.
The inputs of this module have functions tasks in the application.
( see page 320 ) which, in certain cases, are common to a
group of channels. Thus, it is possible to assign the 2 channel groups of the module to the various
Specific function
The channel filter time
for this module is configured in groups of 8 channels:
normal, or fast mode.
With this base unit, when configuring the channels under XTEL-CONF, the user can choose that positive pulses of more than 2 ms are recognized.
194
35008167 12/2018
Key:
SV
IS
(1)
(2)
TBX DES 16F22
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX DES 16F22
Nominal voltage +SV
Supply voltage +SV
Current drawn on +SV of the base module (at
24 V) (1) if basic unit if extension base unit
Current drawn at +SV by extension module (at 24 V)
Current drawn at +IS (at 24 V)
(loading = 60 % of inputs ON)
Power dissipated in the base unit (2)
(loading = 60 % of inputs ON)
Dielectric strength between inputs and ground (GND)
Isolation resistance
24 V DC
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
40 mA typically
10 mA typically
30 mA typically
70 mA typically
2,6 W at 24 V
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Power supply to module (communication module if present and input interfaces).
Power supply to sensors.
Current drawn on +SV by the communication module of the base unit:
70 mA (at 24 V).
Power dissipated in the communication module of the base: 1,7 W at
24 V
35008167 12/2018
195
TBX DES 16F22
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 16F22
General characteristics
This table presents the characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 16F22:
Module TBX DES 16F22
Nominal voltage IS
Current at 24 V
Sensor power supply IS
Voltage for ON state
Current at 11 V
Voltage for OFF state
Current for OFF state
Input impedance
Switch-on time
Switch-off time fast filtering slow filtering fast filtering slow filtering
Permitted line resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted line resistance (volt-free contact)
Permitted leakage resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted leakage resistance (volt-free contact)
IEC standard 1131
Compatibility with Telemecanique 2 wire proximity sensors
Compatibility with CENELEC 3 wire proximity sensors
Compatible with TBX transistor outputs
Type of input
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel at ON state
Protection of +C terminals against overload or short-circuit
Protection against a reverse polarity on IS
24 V DC
7 mA
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
≥ 11 V
≥ 6 mA
< 5 V
≤ 2 mA
3,4 kΩ
0,3 to 1.5 ms
4,5 to 8.5 ms
0,3 to 1.5 ms
4,5 to 8.5 ms
100 Ω
500 Ω
> 100 kΩ
> 30 kΩ
Type 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Current sink
Positive
0,17 W
No
Yes: reverse diode in parallel (ext. fuse 2 A
(quick blow))
Key:
IS Power supply to sensors.
196
35008167 12/2018
Connecting the module TBX DES 16F22
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a current sink input.
TBX DES 16F22
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 18 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 14 V.
35008167 12/2018
197
TBX DES 16F22
Terminal block wiring
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
198
NOTE: A 2 A quick blow fuse, wired to the sensor power supply IS is needed against short-circuits concerning the Cs
.
It is not necessary to connect the two +IS terminals together, nor the two -IS terminals. The -SV terminal and a -IS (0 V) terminal must however be connected together.
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX DES 1633
35008167 12/2018
The TBX DES 1633 distributed input module Chapter 15
The TBX DES 1633 distributed input module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX DES 1633 module, its characteristics and the terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX DES 1633 module
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 1633
Connecting the module TBX DES 1633
Page
35008167 12/2018
199
Key:
SV
IS
(1)
(2)
TBX DES 1633
Introduction to the TBX DES 1633 module
General
The TBX DES 1633 distributed input module is a modular base unit comprising 16 48 V DC inputs, compatible with 2 and 3 wire proximity sensors. The module is equipped with a terminal block for direct wiring of the sensors, which can be removed when it is switched off.
The sensor voltage is monitored to ensure that there is sufficient voltage for the inputs to operate correctly.
The inputs of this module have functions tasks in the application.
( see page 320 ) which, in certain cases, are common to a
group of channels. Thus, it is possible to assign the 2 channel groups of the module to the various
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX DES 1633
Nominal voltage +SV
Supply voltage +SV
Current drawn on +SV of the base module (at
24 V) (1) if basic unit if extension base unit
Current drawn at +SV by extension module (at 48 V)
Current drawn at +IS (at 48 V)
(loading = 60 % of inputs ON)
Power dissipated in the base unit (2)
(loading = 60 % of inputs ON)
Dielectric strength between inputs and ground (GND)
Isolation resistance
48 V DC
38 V DC to 60 V DC
20 mA typically negligible
16 mA typically
70 mA typically
4,3 W at 48 V
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Power supply to module (communication module if present and input interfaces).
Power supply to sensors.
Current drawn on +SV by the communication module of the base unit:
35 mA (at 48 V).
Power dissipated in the communication module of the base: 1,7 W.
200
35008167 12/2018
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 1633
General characteristics
This table presents the characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 1633:
Module TBX DES 1633
Nominal voltage IS
Current at 48 V
Sensor power supply IS
Voltage for ON state
Current at 30 V
Voltage for OFF state
Current for OFF state
Input impedance
Switch-on time
Switch-off time
Permitted line resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted line resistance (volt-free contact)
Permitted leakage resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted leakage resistance (volt-free contact)
IEC standard 1131
Compatibility with Telemecanique 2 wire proximity sensors
Compatibility with CENELEC 3 wire proximity sensors
Compatible with TBX transistor outputs
Type of input
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel at ON state
48 V DC
7 mA
38 V DC to 60 V DC
30 V
≥ 6 mA
< 10 V
≤ 2 mA
6,7 kΩ
5 to 11 ms
5 to 13 ms
100 Ω
500 Ω
> 100 kΩ
> 30 kΩ
Type 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Current sink
Positive
0,33 W
TBX DES 1633
35008167 12/2018
201
TBX DES 1633
Connecting the module TBX DES 1633
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a current sink input.
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 36 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 28 V.
202
35008167 12/2018
Terminal block wiring
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
TBX DES 1633
NOTE: it is not necessary to connect the two +IS terminals
( see page 133 ) together, nor the two -
IS terminals. The -SV terminal and a -IS (0 V) terminal must however be connected together.
35008167 12/2018
203
TBX DES 1633
204
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX DMS 16C22
35008167 12/2018
The TBX DMS 16C22 distributed input/output module Chapter 16
The TBX DMS 16C22 distributed input/output module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX DMS 16C22 module, its characteristics and the terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Introduction to the TBX DMS 16C22 module
Topic
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 16C22
Connecting the module TBX DMS 16C22
Page
35008167 12/2018
205
TBX DMS 16C22
Introduction to the TBX DMS 16C22 module
General
The TBX DMS 16C22 is a modular base unit with 8 24 V DC inputs compatible with 2- and 3-wire proximity sensors, and 8 24 V DC transistor outputs. The module is equipped with a terminal for the direct wiring of sensors and preactuators which can be removed when the power is switched off.
The sensor voltage and preactuator voltage are monitored to ensure that there is sufficient voltage for the inputs to operate correctly and for coherent processing of the outputs.
The outputs are protected against overloads and short-circuits. If there is a fault at an output, it is set to a safe state, the default state, which is determined by the user: fallback position.
Once the fault has been corrected, the output can be reactivated, if it is reset
The inputs/outputs of this module have functions
to the various tasks in the application.
( see page 320 ) which, in certain cases, are
common to a group of channels. Thus, it is possible to assign the 2 channel groups of the module
Specific function
The input and output wiring check
functions for this module continually check the
quality of the connections to the sensors and preactuators. Two dip-switches
the board, enable the channels to be adapted to their environment.
Output wiring check faults enable diagnosis of a short-circuit or an open circuit depending on the channel state.
The module provides independent power supplies: +Csn,n+1
which are protected against line short-circuits (0.1 A maximum current).
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX DMS 16C22
Nominal voltage +SV
Supply voltage +SV
Current drawn on +SV of the base module (at
24 V)
Current drawn at +SV by extension module (at 24 V)
Current drawn at +IS (at 24 V)
(loading = 60 %)
Current drawn at +OS (at 24 V)
(with no active outputs) if basic unit if extension base unit
24 V DC
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
40 mA typically
10 mA typically
30 mA typically
35 mA typically
25 mA typically
206
35008167 12/2018
TBX DMS 16C22
Key:
SV
IS
OS
TBX DMS 16C22
Power dissipated at nominal load in the module
(loading = 60 %)
Dielectric strength between inputs and ground (GND)
Isolation resistance
3,4 W at 24 V
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Power supply to module (communication module if present and input/output interfaces).
Power supply to sensors.
Power supply to pre-actuators.
35008167 12/2018
207
TBX DMS 16C22
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 16C22
General characteristics of the inputs
This table presents the characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DMS 16C22:
Module TBX DMS 16C22
Nominal voltage IS
Nominal current
Sensor supply IS or S
Voltage for ON state
Current at 11 V
Voltage for OFF state
Current for OFF state
Input impedance
Switch-on time
Switch-off time fast filtering slow filtering fast filtering slow filtering
Permitted line resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted line resistance (volt-free contact)
Permitted leakage resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted leakage resistance (volt-free contact)
IEC standard 1131
Compatibility with Telemecanique 2 wire proximity sensors
Compatibility with CENELEC 3 wire proximity sensors
Compatible with TBX transistor outputs
Type of input
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel at ON state
24 V DC
7 mA
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
7 V
≥ 6 mA
< 5 V
≤ 2 mA
3,4 kΩ
5 to 8.5 ms
30 to 45 ms
5 to 8.5 ms
30 to 45 ms
100 Ω
500 Ω
(1)
(1)
Type 2
Yes
Yes (2)
Yes
Current sink
Positive
0,17 W
208
35008167 12/2018
TBX DMS 16C22
Module TBX DMS 16C22
Protection of +C terminals against overload or short-circuit
Protection against a reverse polarity on IS
Yes
Yes: reverse diode in parallel (ext. fuse 1 A
(quick blow))
Key:
IS
(1)
(2)
Power supply to sensors.
Permitted leakage resistance values are not included in this table
With a standard 3 wire proximity sensor, with a resistor in parallel
( see page 115 ) , the open circuit fault corresponds to a break in the
input/proximity sensor link, or in the +power supply (+Cs) of the
3 wire proximity sensor.
Note: the break in the - power supply to the proximity sensor (-Cs) is not detected.
General characteristics of the outputs
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DMS 16C22:
Module TBX DMS 16C22
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
OS supply voltage limits
Permitted filament lamp power
Leakage current at OFF state
Residual voltage at ON state
Switching time at ON or OFF state
Load impedance at ON state
Primary/secondary dielectric behavior
Outputs protected against overloads
Outputs protected against overvoltages
Protection against a reverse polarity on OS
Detection of break in load
Conforms to IEC 1131
Compatible with DC inputs
24 V DC
0,5 A
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
8 W
< 2,3 mA
< 0,4 V
< 1,5 ms
> 50 Ω
< 3 kΩ
1500 V rms. 50 Hz
Yes: thermal
Yes: Zener diode
Yes: reverse-mounted diode (external 8 A fuse)
Yes
Yes
Yes (1)
35008167 12/2018
209
TBX DMS 16C22
Module TBX DMS 16C22
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel at ON state
Key:
OS
(1)
Positive
0,35 W
Power supply to pre-actuators.
All inputs for which the impedance is < 3 kΩ.
210
35008167 12/2018
Connecting the module TBX DMS 16C22
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a wiring check input.
TBX DMS 16C22
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 18 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 14 V.
2 Resistance R for a dry contact or a 3-wire proximity sensor enables the input wiring check to be used.
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a transistor output.
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 18 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 14 V.
35008167 12/2018
211
TBX DMS 16C22
Terminal block wiring
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
212
NOTE: a quick blow 1 A external fuse must be wired to the sensor power supply and a quick blow
8 A external fuse must be wired to the preactuator power supply.
The terminals -SV, -IS and -OS (0 V)
must be wired together
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX DMS 16P22
35008167 12/2018
The TBX DMS 16P22 distributed input/output module Chapter 17
The TBX DMS 16P22 distributed input/output module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX DMS 16P22 module, its characteristics and the terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX DMS 16P22 module
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 16P22
Connecting the module TBX DMS 16P22
Page
35008167 12/2018
213
TBX DMS 16P22
Introduction to the TBX DMS 16P22 module
General
The TBX DMS 16P22 is a modular base unit with 24 V DC inputs, compatible with 2 and 3 wire proximity sensors and 24 V DC 0.5 A transistor outputs. The number of inputs/outputs is variable
(8I/8O, 9I/7O, ..., 16I/0O).
The module is equipped with a terminal block for direct wiring of the sensors and preactuators, which can be removed when it is switched off.
The sensor voltage and preactuator voltage are monitored to ensure that there is sufficient voltage for the inputs to operate correctly and for coherent processing of the outputs.
The outputs are protected against overloads and short-circuits. If there is a fault at an output, it is set to a safe state, the default state, which is determined by the user: fallback position.
Once the fault has been corrected, the output can be reactivated, if it is reset
The inputs/outputs of this module have functions
to the various tasks in the application.
( see page 320 ) which, in certain cases, are
common to a group of channels. Thus, it is possible to assign the 2 channel groups of the module
Specific function
Each of the channels 8 to 15 of this base unit can be programmed to 8 inputs.
( see page 325 ) , either as an
input or as an output. This enables one base unit to have either 16 inputs, or 1 to 8 outputs and 15
214
35008167 12/2018
TBX DMS 16P22
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX DMS 16P22
Nominal voltage +SV
Supply voltage +SV
Current drawn on +SV of the base module (at
24 V) if basic unit if extension base unit
Current drawn at +SV by extension module (at 24 V)
Current drawn at +IS (at 24 V)
(loading = 60 %)
Current drawn at +OS (at 24 V)
(with no active outputs)
Power dissipated at nominal load in the module
(loading = 60 %)
Dielectric strength between inputs and ground (GND)
Isolation resistance
24 V DC
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
30 mA typically negligible
25 mA typically
75 mA typically
100 mA typically
6,5 W at 24 V
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Key:
SV
IS
OS
Power supply to module (communication module if present and input/output interfaces).
Power supply to sensors.
Power supply to pre-actuators.
35008167 12/2018
215
TBX DMS 16P22
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 16P22
General characteristics of the inputs
This table presents the characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DMS 16P22:
Module TBX DMS 16P22
Nominal voltage IS
Nominal current
Sensor supply IS or S
Voltage for ON state
Current at 11 V
Voltage for OFF state
Current for OFF state
Input impedance
Switch-on time
Switch-off time
Permitted line resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted line resistance (volt-free contact)
Permitted leakage resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted leakage resistance (volt-free contact)
IEC standard 1131
Compatibility with Telemecanique 2 wire proximity sensors
Compatibility with CENELEC 3 wire proximity sensors
Compatible with TBX transistor outputs
Type of input
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel at ON state
Protection of +C terminals against overload or short-circuit
Protection against a reverse polarity on IS
24 V DC
15 mA
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
≥ 11 V
≥ 6 mA
< 5 V
≤ 2 mA
1,6 kΩ
5 to 10 ms
5 to 12 ms
100 Ω
500 Ω
> 100 kΩ
> 30 kΩ
Type 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Resistive
Positive
0,36 W
No
Yes: reverse diode in parallel (ext. fuse 1 A
(quick blow))
Key:
IS Power supply to sensors.
216
35008167 12/2018
TBX DMS 16P22
General characteristics of the outputs
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DMS 16P22:
Module TBX DMS 16P22
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
OS supply voltage limits
Permitted filament lamp power
Leakage current at OFF state
Residual voltage at ON state
Switching time at ON or OFF state
Load impedance at ON state
Primary/secondary dielectric behavior
Outputs protected against overloads
Outputs protected against overvoltages
Protection against a reverse polarity on OS
Detection of break in load
Conforms to IEC 1131
Compatible with DC inputs
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel at ON state
Protection of +C terminals against overload or short-circuit
Protection against a reverse polarity on IS
24 V DC
0,5 A
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
8 W
< 0,5 mA
< 0,4 V
≤ 1 ms
> 50 Ω
1500 V rms. 50 Hz
Yes: thermal
Yes: Zener diode
Yes: reverse-mounted diode (external 8 A fuse)
No
Yes
Yes
Positive
0,35 W
No
Yes: reverse diode in parallel (ext. fuse 2 A
(quick blow))
Key:
OS Power supply to preactuators.
35008167 12/2018
217
TBX DMS 16P22
Connecting the module TBX DMS 16P22
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a resistive input.
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 18 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 14 V.
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a programmable input/output.
218
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 18 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 14 V.
35008167 12/2018
Terminal block wiring
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
TBX DMS 16P22
NOTE: a quick blow 8 A fuse must be wired to the sensor/preactuator power supply.
The two +S terminals
as well as the two -S terminals. The -SV terminal and a -S
(0 V) terminal must also be connected together.
35008167 12/2018
219
TBX DMS 16P22
220
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX DMS 16C222
35008167 12/2018
The TBX DMS 16C222 distributed input/output module Chapter 18
The TBX DMS 16C222 distributed input/output module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX DMS 16C222 module, its characteristics and terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX DMS 16C222 module
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 16C222
Connecting the module TBX DMS 16C222
Page
35008167 12/2018
221
TBX DMS 16C222
Introduction to the TBX DMS 16C222 module
General
The TBX DMS 16C222 is a modular base unit with 8 24 V DC inputs compatible with 2- and 3-wire proximity sensors, and 8 24 V DC 2A transistor outputs. The module is equipped with a terminal for the direct wiring of sensors and preactuators which can be removed when the power is switched off.
The sensor voltage and preactuator voltage are monitored to ensure that there is sufficient voltage for the inputs to operate correctly and for coherent processing of the outputs. Monitoring the voltage of the preactuators requires that shunts are installed.
The outputs are protected against overloads and short-circuits. If there is a fault at an output, it is set to a safe state, the default state, which is determined by the user: fallback position.
Once the fault has been corrected, the output can be reactivated, if it is reset
The inputs of this module have functions tasks in the application.
( see page 320 ) which, in certain cases, are common to a
group of channels. Thus, it is possible to assign the 2 channel groups of the module to the various
Specific function
The wiring check ( see page 328 ) function for this module continually checks the quality of the
connections to the sensors and preactuators.
environment.
( see page 115 ) , on the board, enable the channels to be adapted to their
Output wiring check faults enable diagnosis of a short-circuit or an open circuit depending on the channel state.
The module provides independent power supplies: +Csn,n+1
which are protected against line short-circuits (0.1 A maximum current).
222
35008167 12/2018
TBX DMS 16C222
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX DMS 16C222
Nominal voltage
Supply voltage +SV
Current drawn on +SV of the base module (at
24 V) if basic unit if extension base unit
Current drawn at +SV by extension module (at 24 V)
Current drawn at +IS (at 24 V)
(loading = 60 %)
Current drawn at +OS (at 24 V)
(with no active outputs)
Power dissipated at nominal load in the module
(loading = 60 %)
Dielectric strength between inputs and ground (GND)
Isolation resistance
24 V DC
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
45 mA typically
10 mA typically
35 mA typically
35 mA typically
25 mA typically
8,1 W at 24 V
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Key:
SV
IS
OS
Power supply to module (communication module if present and input/output interfaces).
Power supply to sensors.
Power supply to pre-actuators.
35008167 12/2018
223
TBX DMS 16C222
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 16C222
General characteristics of the inputs
This table presents the characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DMS 16C222:
Module TBX DMS 16C222
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
Sensor power supply IS
Voltage for ON state
Current at 11 V
Voltage for OFF state
Current for OFF state
Input impedance
Switch-on time
Switch-off time fast filtering slow filtering fast filtering slow filtering
Permitted line resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted line resistance (volt-free contact)
Permitted leakage resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted leakage resistance (volt-free contact)
IEC standard 1131
Compatibility with Telemecanique 2 wire proximity sensors
Compatibility with CENELEC 3 wire proximity sensors
Compatible with TBX transistor outputs
Type of input
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel at ON state
24 V DC
7 mA
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
7 V
≥ 6 mA
< 5 V
≤ 2 mA
3,4 kΩ
5 to 8.5 ms
30 to 45 ms
5 to 8.5 ms
30 to 45 ms
100 Ω
500 Ω
(1)
(1)
Type 2
Yes
Yes (2)
Yes
Current sink
Positive
0,17 W
224
35008167 12/2018
TBX DMS 16C222
Module TBX DMS 16C222
Protection of +C terminals against overload or short-circuit
Protection against a reverse polarity on IS
Yes
Yes: reverse diode in parallel (ext. fuse 1 A
(quick blow))
Key:
IS
(1)
(2)
Power supply to sensors.
Permitted leakage resistance values are not
included in this table ( see page 115 )
.
With a standard 3 wire proximity sensor, with a resistor in parallel
( see page 115 ) , the open circuit
fault corresponds to a break in the input/proximity sensor link, or in the +power supply (+Cs) of the
3 wire proximity sensor.
Note: the break in the - power supply to the proximity sensor (-Cs) is not detected.
General characteristics of the outputs
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DMS 16C222:
Module TBX DMS 16C222
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
OS supply voltage limits
Permitted filament lamp power
Leakage current at OFF state
Residual voltage at ON state
Switching time at ON or OFF state
Load impedance at ON state
Outputs protected against overloads
Outputs protected against overvoltages
Protection against a reverse polarity on OS
Detection of break in load
Conforms to IEC 1131
24 V DC
2 A
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
15 W
< 2,5 mA
< 0,8 V
< 1 ms
> 12 Ω
< 3 kΩ
Yes: current limited to > 2.5 A
Yes: Zener diode
Yes: reverse-mounted diode (external 20 A very fast)
Yes
Yes
35008167 12/2018
225
TBX DMS 16C222
Module TBX DMS 16C222
Compatible with DC inputs
Power dissipated per channel at ON state
Yes (1)
1,7 W
Key:
OS
(1)
Power supply to preactuators.
All inputs for which the impedance is < 3 kΩ.
Current derating
The following graph shows the current derating as a function of the temperature.
226
The maximum possible current as a function of temperature (°C) can be defined as the sum of the output currents for the module.
Curve 1: the current at the 8 outputs is identical and less than 2 A per output. For example:
8 outputs at 1 A at 60 °C,
8 outputs at 1.3 A at 50 °C.
Curve 2: the maximum current at an individual output reaches, but at no point exceeds, 2.5 A.
For example:
2 outputs at 2.5 A + 1 output at 1 A at 60 °C,
5 outputs at 2.5 A + 1 output at 1.5 A at 30 °C.
35008167 12/2018
Connecting the module TBX DMS 16C222
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a wiring check input.
TBX DMS 16C222
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 18 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 14 V.
2 Resistance R for a dry contact or a 3-wire proximity sensor enables the input wiring check to be used.
35008167 12/2018
227
TBX DMS 16C222
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a 24 V -2 A transistor output.
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 18 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 14 V.
228
35008167 12/2018
Terminal block wiring
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
TBX DMS 16C222
NOTE: you must wire an external 1 A quick blow fuse on the sensor power supply and 20 A on the preactuator power supply.
The four terminals
x,y
must be wired together via an external shunt, reference
TBX RV 015. The -SV, -IS and -OS terminals must also be wired together.
35008167 12/2018
229
TBX DMS 16C222
230
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX DMS 1025
35008167 12/2018
The TBX DMS 1025 distributed input/output module Chapter 19
The TBX DMS 1025 distributed input/output module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX DMS 1025 module, its characteristics and the terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX DMS 1025 module
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 1025
Connecting the module TBX DMS 1025
Page
35008167 12/2018
231
TBX DMS 1025
Introduction to the TBX DMS 1025 module
General
The TBX DMS 1025 is a modular base unit comprising 8 24 V DC inputs, compatible with 2 and
3 wire proximity sensors and 2 50 VA relay outputs. The module is equipped with a terminal block for direct wiring of the sensors and preactuators, which can be removed when it is switched off.
The sensor voltage is monitored to ensure that there is sufficient voltage for the inputs to operate correctly.
The inputs of this module have functions tasks in the application.
( see page 320 ) which, in certain cases, are common to a
group of channels. Thus, it is possible to assign the 2 channel groups of the module to the various
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX DMS 1025
Nominal voltage
Supply voltage +SV
Current drawn on +SV of the base module (at
24 V) if basic unit if extension base unit
Current drawn at +SV by extension module (at 24 V)
Current drawn at +IS (at 24 V)
(loading = 60 %)
Power dissipated at nominal load in the module
(loading = 60 %)
Dielectric strength between inputs and ground (GND)
Isolation resistance
24 V DC
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
35 mA typically
25 mA typically
10 mA typically
75 mA typically
2,6 W at 24 V
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Key:
SV
IS
Power supply to module (communication module if present and input/output interfaces).
Power supply to sensors.
232
35008167 12/2018
TBX DMS 1025
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 1025
General characteristics of the inputs
This table presents the characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DMS 1025:
Module TBX DMS 1025
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
Sensor power supply IS
Voltage for ON state
Current at 11 V
Voltage for OFF state
Current for OFF state
Input impedance
Switch-on time
Switch-off time
Permitted line resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted line resistance (volt-free contact)
Permitted leakage resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted leakage resistance (volt-free contact)
IEC standard 1131
Compatibility with Telemecanique 2 wire proximity sensors
Compatibility with CENELEC 3 wire proximity sensors
Compatible with TBX transistor outputs
Type of input
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel at ON state
24 V DC
15 mA
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
≥ 11 V
≥ 6 mA
< 5 V
≤ 2 mA
1,6 kΩ
5 to 15 ms
5 to 17 ms
100 Ω
500 Ω
> 100 Ω
> 30 Ω
Type 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Resistive
Positive
0,36 W
35008167 12/2018
233
TBX DMS 1025
General characteristics of the outputs
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DMS 1025:
Module TBX DMS 1025
Operating voltage 19.2 to 30 V
24 to 264 V
Permitted DC power DC12 resistive loads 24 W 0.2 x 10 6 operations
Permitted DC power DC13 inductive loads
(L/R = 60 ms)
Permitted AC current AC12 resistive loads
10 W 10 6 operations
1 A - 110/220 V 0.2 x 10 6
0,5 A - 110/220 V 2 x 10
1 A -24/48 V 0.5 x 10
6
2 A - 24 V 0,2 x 10 6
6 operations operations operations operations
Permitted AC current AC15 inductive loads 50 VA - 110/220 V 10 6
0.5 A - 24/48 V 10 6
10 VA -48/220 V 10
1 A - 24 V 0.2 x 10 6
7 operations operations operations operations
30 A peak 50 operations Accidental power breaks
(opening due to inrush current of the contactor)
Thermal current (1)
Switch-on response time
Switch-off response time
Dielectric strength of contacts
3 A
10 ms max.
20 ms max.
2000 V rms.
Compatible with DC inputs Yes
Preactuators protected against overvoltages No internal protection (2)
Protection against short-circuits and overloads No internal protection
234
35008167 12/2018
Module TBX DMS 1025
Common per channel
Type of contact
Key:
(1)
(2)
TBX DMS 1025
1 for 2 channels normally open
Maximum value of current which can cross the contact without damaging it.
This value, which is associated with the relay, should not be confused with the permissible current, relating to the module. The permissible current takes into account the breaking capacity of the relay (maximum switching current) and the characteristics of the other components which constitute the output.
With an inductive load on an AC supply, an RC or GMOV peak limiter circuit must be wired across the load.
For DC, wire a reverse mounted diode in parallel to the load.
35008167 12/2018
235
TBX DMS 1025
Connecting the module TBX DMS 1025
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a resistive input.
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 18 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 14 V.
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram of a relay output (normally open contacts).
236
35008167 12/2018
TBX DMS 1025
Terminal block wiring
The diagram on the following page represents an example of wiring: the module outputs grouped together by the user have a single power supply.
The NC terminals
TBX RV 015.
are not wired within the modules, but are used to distribute the power supply neutral to the various loads. For this purpose, use connecting combs, reference
A connecting comb is also used to connect the relay commons (C8.9, C10.11,...) with the supply phase.
35008167 12/2018
237
TBX DMS 1025
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
238
NOTE: the -SV terminal
and the -IS (0 V) terminal must be connected together.
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX DMS 1625
35008167 12/2018
The TBX DMS 1625 distributed input/output module Chapter 20
The TBX DMS 1625 distributed input/output module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX DMS 1625 module, its characteristics and the terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX DMS 1625 module
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 1625
Connecting the module TBX DMS 1625
Page
35008167 12/2018
239
TBX DMS 1625
Introduction to the TBX DMS 1625 module
General
The TBX DMS 1625 is a modular base unit comprising 8 24 V DC inputs, compatible with 8 and
3 wire proximity sensors and 2 50 VA relay outputs. The module is equipped with a terminal block for direct wiring of the sensors and preactuators, which can be removed when it is switched off.
The sensor voltage is monitored to ensure that there is sufficient voltage for the inputs to operate correctly.
The inputs of this module have functions tasks in the application.
( see page 320 ) which, in certain cases, are common to a
group of channels. Thus, it is possible to assign the 2 channel groups of the module to the various
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX DMS 1625 (1)
Nominal voltage
Supply voltage +SV
Current drawn on +SV of the base module (at
24 V) if basic unit if extension base unit
Current drawn at +SV by extension module (at 24 V)
Current drawn at +IS (at 24 V)
(loading = 60 %)
Power dissipated at nominal load in the module
(loading = 60 %)
Dielectric strength between inputs and ground (GND)
Isolation resistance
24 V DC
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
80 mA typically
70 mA typically
10 mA typically
75 mA typically
3,7 W at 24 V
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Key:
SV
IS
(1)
Power supply to module (communication module if present and input/output interfaces).
Power supply to sensors.
For a configuration comprising 2 TBX DMS 1625 base units, the maximum ambient temperature is 40 °C, if the 2 base units are used at 100 % (16 ON relays).
240
35008167 12/2018
TBX DMS 1625
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 1625
General characteristics of the inputs
This table presents the characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DMS 1625:
Module TBX DMS 1625
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
Sensor power supply IS
Voltage for ON state
Current at 11 V
Voltage for OFF state
Current for OFF state
Input impedance
Switch-on time
Switch-off time
Permitted line resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted line resistance (volt-free contact)
Permitted leakage resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted leakage resistance (volt-free contact)
IEC standard 1131
Compatibility with Telemecanique 2 wire proximity sensors
Compatibility with CENELEC 3 wire proximity sensors
Compatible with TBX transistor outputs
Type of input
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel at ON state
24 V DC
15 mA
19.2 V DC to 30 V DC
≥ 11 V
≥ 6 mA
< 5 V
≤ 2 mA
1,6 kΩ
5 to 15 ms
5 to 17 ms
100 Ω
500 Ω
> 100 Ω
> 30 Ω
Type 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Resistive
Positive
0,36 W
35008167 12/2018
241
TBX DMS 1625
General characteristics of the outputs
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DMS 1625:
Module TBX DMS 1625
Operating voltage 19,2 to 30 V
24 to 264 V
Permitted DC power DC12 resistive loads 24 W 0.2 x 10 6 operations
Permitted DC power DC13 inductive loads
(L/R = 60 ms)
Permitted AC current AC12 resistive loads
10 W 10 6 operations
1 A - 110/220 V 0.2 x 10 6
0,5 A - 110/220 V 2 x 10
1 A -24/48 V 0.5 x 10
6
2 A - 24 V 0.2 x 10 6
6 operations operations operations operations
Permitted AC current AC15 inductive loads 50 VA - 110/220 V 10 6
0,5 A - 24/48 V 10 6
10 VA -48/220 V 10
1 A - 24 V 0.2 x 10 6
7 operations operations operations operations
30 A peak 50 operations Accidental power breaks
(opening due to inrush current of the contactor)
Thermal current (1)
Switch-on response time
Switch-off response time
Dielectric strength of contacts
3 A
10 ms max.
20 ms max.
2000 V rms.
Compatible with DC inputs Yes
Preactuators protected against overvoltages No internal protection (2)
Protection against short-circuits and overloads No internal protection
242
35008167 12/2018
Module TBX DMS 1625
Common per channel
Type of contact
Key:
(1)
(2)
TBX DMS 1625
1 for 2 channels normally open
Maximum value of current which can cross the contact without damaging it.
This value, which is associated with the relay, should not be confused with the permissible current, relating to the module. The permissible current takes into account the breaking capacity of the relay
(maximum switching current) and the characteristics of the other components which constitute the output.
With an inductive load on an AC supply, an RC or
GMOV peak limiter circuit must be wired across the load.
For DC, wire a reverse mounted diode in parallel to the load.
35008167 12/2018
243
TBX DMS 1625
Connecting the module TBX DMS 1625
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a resistive input.
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 18 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 14 V.
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram of a relay output (normally open contacts).
244
35008167 12/2018
TBX DMS 1625
Terminal block wiring
The diagram on the following page represents an example of wiring: the module outputs grouped together by the user have a single power supply.
The NC terminals
TBX RV 015.
are not wired within the modules, but are used to distribute the power supply neutral to the various loads. For this purpose, use connecting combs, reference
A connecting comb is also used to connect the relay commons (C8.9, C10.11,...) with the supply phase.
35008167 12/2018
245
TBX DMS 1625
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
246
NOTE: the -SV terminal
and the -IS (0 V) terminal must be connected together.
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX DSS 1622
35008167 12/2018
The TBX DSS 1622 distributed output module Chapter 21
The TBX DSS 1622 distributed output module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX DSS 1622 module, its characteristics and terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX DSS 1622 module
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DSS 1622
Connecting the module TBX DSS 1622
Page
35008167 12/2018
247
TBX DSS 1622
Introduction to the TBX DSS 1622 module
General
The TBX DSS 1622 is a modular base unit which has 16 transistor outputs 24 V DC 0.5 A. The module is equipped with a terminal for direct wiring of the sensors and preactuators, which can be removed when it is switched off.
The preactuator voltage is monitored to ensure coherent processing of the outputs during variations in the power supply.
The outputs are protected against overloads and short-circuits. If there is a fault at an output, it is set to a safe state, the default state, which is determined by the user: fallback position.
Once the fault has been corrected, the output can be reactivated, if it is reset
The outputs of this base unit have functions
the various tasks in the application.
( see page 320 ) which, in certain cases, are common
to a group of channels. Thus, it is possible to assign the 2 channel groups of these base units to
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX DSS 1622
Nominal voltage +SV
Supply voltage +SV
Current drawn on +SV of the base module (at
24 V) if basic unit if extension base unit
Current drawn at +SV by extension module (at 24 V)
Current drawn at +OS (at 24 V)
(with no active output)
Power dissipated in the base unit
(loading = 60 %)
Dielectric strength between inputs and ground (GND)
Isolation resistance
24 V DC
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
30 mA typically negligible
25 mA typically
35 mA typically
4,1 W at 24 V
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Key:
SV
OS
Power supply to module (communication module if present and input interfaces).
Power supply to pre-actuators.
248
35008167 12/2018
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DSS 1622
General characteristics
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DSS 1622:
Module TBX DSS 1622
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
OS supply voltage limits
Permitted filament lamp power
Leakage current at OFF state
Residual voltage at ON state
Switching time at ON or OFF state
Load impedance at ON state
Outputs protected against overloads
Outputs protected against overvoltages
Protection against reverse polarity on preactuator supply
Detection of break in load
Conforms to IEC 1131
Compatible with DC inputs
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel at ON state
24 V DC
0.5 A
19.2 V DC to 30 V DC
8 W
< 0,5 mA
< 0,4 V
< 1 ms
> 50 Ω
Yes: thermal
Yes: Zener diode
Yes: reverse-mounted diode (external 12 A fuse)
No
Yes
Yes
Positive
0,35 W
TBX DSS 1622
Key:
OS Power supply to pre-actuators.
35008167 12/2018
249
TBX DSS 1622
Connecting the module TBX DSS 1622
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a 24 V -0.5 A transistor output.
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 18 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 14 V.
250
35008167 12/2018
Terminal block wiring
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
TBX DSS 1622
NOTE: a quick blow 12 A fuse must be wired to the sensor/preactuator power supply.
The two +OS terminals
the -SV terminal and an -OS terminal.
must be wired together as well as the two -OS terminals,
35008167 12/2018
251
TBX DSS 1622
252
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX DSS 16C22
35008167 12/2018
The TBX DSS 16C22 distributed output module Chapter 22
The TBX DSS 16C22 distributed output module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX DSS 16C22 module, its characteristics and the terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX DSS 16C22 module
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DSS 16C22
Connecting the module TBX DSS 16C22
Page
35008167 12/2018
253
TBX DSS 16C22
Introduction to the TBX DSS 16C22 module
General
The TBX DSS 16C22 is a modular base unit which has 16 transistor outputs 24 V DC 0.5 A. The module is equipped with a terminal for direct wiring of the sensors and preactuators, which can be removed when it is switched off.
The preactuator voltage is monitored to ensure coherent processing of the outputs during variations in the power supply.
The outputs are protected against overloads and short-circuits. If there is a fault at an output, it is set to a safe state, the default state, which is determined by the user: fallback position.
Once the fault has been corrected, the output can be reactivated, if it is reset
The outputs of this base unit have functions
the various tasks in the application.
( see page 320 ) which, in certain cases, are common
to a group of channels. Thus, it is possible to assign the 2 channel groups of these base units to
Specific function
The wiring check ( see page 328
connections to the preactuators.
) function for this module continually checks the quality of the
Output wiring check faults enable diagnosis of a short-circuit or an open circuit depending on the channel state.
254
35008167 12/2018
TBX DSS 16C22
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX DSS 16C22
Nominal voltage +SV
Supply voltage +SV
Current drawn on +SV of the base module (at
24 V) if basic unit if extension base unit
Current drawn at +SV by extension module (at 24 V)
Current drawn at +OS (at 24 V)
(with no active output)
Power dissipated in the base unit
(loading = 60 %)
Dielectric strength between inputs and ground (GND)
Isolation resistance
24 V DC
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
30 mA typically negligible
25 mA typically
35 mA typically
4,3 W at 24 V
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Key:
SV
OS
Power supply to module (communication module if present and input interfaces).
Power supply to pre-actuators.
35008167 12/2018
255
TBX DSS 16C22
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DSS 16C22
General characteristics
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DSS 16C22:
Module TBX DSS 16C22
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
OS supply voltage limits
Permitted filament lamp power
Leakage current at OFF state
Residual voltage at ON state
Switching time at ON or OFF state
Load impedance at ON state
Outputs protected against overloads
Outputs protected against overvoltages
Protection against reverse polarity on preactuator supply
Detection of break in load
Conforms to IEC 1131
Compatible with DC inputs
Type of logic
Power dissipated per channel at ON state
24 V DC
0,5 A
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
8 W
< 2 mA
< 0,4 V
≤ 1 ms
> 50 Ω
< 30 kΩ
Yes: thermal
Yes: Zener diode
Yes: reverse-mounted diode (external 12 A fuse)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Positive
0,35 W
Key:
OS Power supply to pre-actuators.
256
35008167 12/2018
TBX DSS 16C22
Connecting the module TBX DSS 16C22
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for a 24 V -0.5 A transistor output.
1 Guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage OK: > 18 V, guaranteed threshold for monitored voltage faulty: < 14 V.
35008167 12/2018
257
TBX DSS 16C22
Terminal block wiring
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
258
NOTE: a quick blow 12 A fuse must be wired to the sensor/preactuator power supply.
The two +OS terminals
must be wired together as well as the two -OS terminals.
The -SV terminal and a -OS (0 V) terminal must also be wired together.
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX DSS 1625
35008167 12/2018
The TBX DSS 1625 distributed output module Chapter 23
The TBX DSS 1625 distributed output module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX DSS 1625 module, its characteristics and terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX DSS 1625 module
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DSS 1625
Connecting the module TBX DSS 1625
Page
35008167 12/2018
259
TBX DSS 1625
Introduction to the TBX DSS 1625 module
General
The TBX DSS 1625 is a modular base unit comprising 16 50 VA relay outputs. The module is equipped with a terminal block for direct wiring of the preactuators, which can be removed when it is switched off.
The outputs of this module have functions
tasks in the application.
which, in certain cases, are common to a group of channels. Thus, it is possible to assign the 2 channel groups of the module to the various
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX DSS 1625
Nominal voltage +SV
Supply voltage +SV
Current drawn on +SV of the base module (at
24 V)
(with 60 % of the relays active) if basic unit if extension base unit
Current drawn at +SV by extension module (at 24 V)
(with 60 % of the relays active)
Immunity to +SV microbreaks
(with 60 % of the relays active)
Power dissipated at nominal load in the module
(with 60 % of the relays active)
Dielectric strength between inputs and ground (GND)
Isolation resistance
24 V DC
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
125 mA typically negligible
115 mA typically
10 ms
3,1 W at 24 V
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Key:
SV Power supply to module (communication module if present and input interfaces).
260
35008167 12/2018
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DSS 1625
General characteristics
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DSS 1625:
Module TBX DSS 1625
DC operating voltage
AC operating voltage
Permitted DC power DC12 resistive loads
19 to 30 V
24 to 264 V
24 W 0.2 x 10 6 operations
Permitted DC power DC13 inductive loads
(L/R = 60 ms)
Permitted AC current AC12 resistive loads
10 W 10 6 operations
1 A - 110/220 V 0.2 x 10 6
0,5 A - 110/220 V 2 x 10
1 A -24/48 V 0.5 x 10
6
2 A - 24 V 0.2 x 10 6
6 operations operations operations operations
Permitted AC current AC15 inductive loads 50 VA - 110/220 V 10 6
0,5 A - 24/48 V 10 6
10 VA -48/220 V 10
1 A - 24 V 0.2 x 10 6
7 operations operations operations operations
30 A peak 50 operations Accidental power breaks
(opening due to inrush current of the contactor)
Thermal current (1)
Switch-on response time
Switch-off response time
Dielectric strength of contacts
3 A
10 ms max.
20 ms max.
2000 V rms.
Compatible with DC inputs Yes
Preactuators protected against overvoltages No internal protection (2)
Protection against short-circuits and overloads No internal protection
TBX DSS 1625
35008167 12/2018
261
TBX DSS 1625
Module TBX DSS 1625
Common per channel
Type of contact
Key:
(1)
(2)
1 for 2 channels normally open
Maximum value of current which can cross the contact without damaging it.
This value, which is associated with the relay, should not be confused with the permissible current, relating to the module. The permissible current takes into account the breaking capacity of the relay (maximum switching current) and the characteristics of the other components which constitute the output.
With an inductive load on an AC supply, an RC or
GMOV peak limiter circuit must be wired across the load.
For DC, wire a reverse mounted diode in parallel to the load.
262
35008167 12/2018
TBX DSS 1625
Connecting the module TBX DSS 1625
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram of a relay output (normally open contacts).
Terminal block wiring
The diagram on the following page represents an example of wiring. The module outputs organized into three groups by the user have separate power supplies:
outputs 0 to 9, outputs 10 and 11, outputs 12 to 15.
The NC terminals
are not wired within the modules, but are used to distribute the power supply neutral to the various loads.
For this purpose, use connecting combs, reference TBX RV 015.
Two connecting combs are also used to connect the relay commons together.
35008167 12/2018
263
TBX DSS 1625
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
264
NOTE: the two N1 terminals ( see page 133 )
are connected together internally.
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX DSS 1235
35008167 12/2018
The TBX DSS 1235 distributed output module Chapter 24
The TBX DSS 1235 distributed output module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX DSS 1235 module, its characteristics and terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX DSS 1235 module
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DSS 1235
Connecting the module TBX DSS 1235
Page
35008167 12/2018
265
TBX DSS 1235
Introduction to the TBX DSS 1235 module
General
The TBX DSS 1235 is a modular base unit comprising 12 100 VA relay outputs. The module is equipped with a terminal block for direct wiring of the preactuators, which can be removed when it is switched off.
The outputs of this module have functions
tasks in the application.
which, in certain cases, are common to a group of channels. Thus, it is possible to assign the 2 channel groups of the module to the various
Relays available on the TBX DSS 1235 module are:
4 groups of 2 normally open (NO). The common for the contact of the two relays is connected to one terminal on the terminal block,
4 change-over (NO and NC) relays.
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX DSS 1235
Nominal voltage +SV
Supply voltage +SV
Current drawn at +SV by the basic module
(with 60 % of the relays active)
Current drawn at +SV by the extension module
(with 60 % of the relays active)
Immunity to +SV microbreaks
(with 60 % of the relays active) if basic unit if extension base unit
Power dissipated at nominal load in the module
(with 60 % of the relays active)
Dielectric strength between inputs and ground (GND)
Isolation resistance
24 V DC
19,2 V DC to 30 V DC
48 V DC
130 mA typically negligible
125 mA typically
70 mA typically negligible
65 mA typically
10 ms
3,1 W at 24 V 3,3 W at 48 V
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
Key:
SV Power supply to module (communication module if present and input interfaces).
266
35008167 12/2018
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DSS 1235
General characteristics
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DSS 1235:
Module TBX DSS 1235
DC operating voltage
AC operating voltage
Permitted DC current DC12 resistive loads
24 to 48 V
24 to 264 V
Permitted DC current DC13 inductive loads
(L/R = 60 ms)
Permitted AC current AC12 resistive loads
2 A - 24 V 0.25 x 10 6
1 A -48 V 0.5 x 10 6 operations operations
2 A - 24 V 0.25 x 10
6
0,5 A -48 V 0.15 x 10
6 operations operations
2 A -110 V 0.5 x 10 6 operations
1 A - 110/220 V 1.5 x 10 6 operations
2 A -24/48 V 0.5 x 10 6
2 A - 24 V 0.2 x 10 6
4 A - 24 V 0.15 x 10 6 operations operations operations (1)
Permitted AC current AC15 inductive loads 100 VA - 110/240 V 10 6
1 A - 24/48 V 10
6
20 VA -48 V 2 x 10
6 operations operations operations
20 VA - 110/240 V 5 x 10 6 operations
30 A peak 50 operations Accidental power breaks
(opening due to inrush current of the contactor)
Thermal current (2)
Switch-on response time
Switch-off response time
Dielectric strength of contacts
7 A
10 ms max.
20 ms max.
2000 V rms.
Compatible with DC inputs Yes
Preactuators protected against overvoltages No internal protection (3)
Protection against short-circuits and overloads No internal protection
TBX DSS 1235
35008167 12/2018
267
TBX DSS 1235
Module TBX DSS 1235
Common per channel
Type of contact
Key:
(1)
(2)
(3)
1 for every 2 channels (channels 0 to 7)
1 per channel (channels 8 to 11) normally open (channels 0 to 7) normally open/normally closed (channels 8 to 11)
Limited to 7 A per terminal (NC) in the case of 2 outputs with common terminal.
Maximum value of current which can cross the contact without damaging it.
This value, which is associated with the relay, should not be confused with the permissible current, relating to the module. The permissible current takes into account the breaking capacity of the relay (maximum switching current) and the characteristics of the other components which constitute the output.
With an inductive load on an AC supply, an RC or GMOV peak limiter circuit must be wired across the load.
For DC, wire a reverse mounted diode in parallel to the load.
268
35008167 12/2018
TBX DSS 1235
Connecting the module TBX DSS 1235
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram of a relay output (normally open contacts, outputs 0 to 7).
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram of a relay output (normally closed and normally open contacts, outputs 8 to 11).
35008167 12/2018
269
TBX DSS 1235
Terminal block wiring
The diagram on the following page represents an example of wiring. The module outputs organized into two groups by the user have separate power supplies:
outputs 0 to 9, outputs 10 to 11.
The NC terminals
TBX RV 015.
are not wired within the modules, but are used to distribute the power supply neutral to the various loads. For this purpose, use connecting combs, reference
A connecting comb is also used to connect the relay commons (C0,1, C2,3,...) with the supply phase.
NOTE: the 8 outputs 0 to 7 are relay outputs with one N/O contact.
The 4 outputs 8 to 11 are relay outputs with a one N/O contact and one N/C contact.
270
35008167 12/2018
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
TBX DSS 1235
NOTE: the two N1 terminals ( see page 133 )
are connected together internally.
35008167 12/2018
271
TBX DSS 1235
272
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX DES 16S04
35008167 12/2018
The TBX DES 16S04 distributed input module Chapter 25
The TBX DES 16S04 distributed input module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX DES 16S04 module, its characteristics and terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX DES 16S04 module
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 16S04
Connecting the module TBX DES 16S04
Page
35008167 12/2018
273
TBX DES 16S04
Introduction to the TBX DES 16S04 module
General
The TBX DES 16S04 is a modular base unit comprising 16 120 V AC inputs, compatible with
2 wire CENELEC proximity sensors. The module is equipped with a terminal block for direct wiring of the sensors, which can be removed when it is switched off.
The sensor voltage is monitored to ensure that there is sufficient voltage for the inputs to operate correctly.
The inputs of this module have functions tasks in the application.
( see page 320 ) which, in certain cases, are common to a
group of channels. Thus, it is possible to assign the 2 channel groups of the module to the various
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX DES 16S04
Nominal voltage 120 V AC
Supply voltage 93 at 132 V AC
Current drawn for the module power supply 60 mA typically
70 mA typically Current drawn for the sensor supply
(loading 60 %)
Power dissipated at nominal load in the module
(loading 60 %)
6 W
Dielectric strength between inputs and ground (GND)
Isolation resistance
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
274
35008167 12/2018
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 16S04
General characteristics
This table presents the characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DES 16S04:
Module TBX DES 16S04
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
Sensor power supply
Voltage for ON state
Current at 74 V
Voltage for OFF state
Current for OFF state
Input impedance
Switch-on time
(change from 0 to 1)
Switch-off time
(change from 1 to 0)
IEC standard 1131
Compatibility with CENELEC 3 wire proximity sensors
Type of input
Type of logic
Sensor common
120 V AC
15 mA
93 at 132 V AC
> 74 V
6 mA
< 20 V
< 4 mA
10 kΩ
5 ms
5 ms
Type 2
Yes
Capacitive
Positive
At the supply phase
TBX DES 16S04
35008167 12/2018
275
TBX DES 16S04
Connecting the module TBX DES 16S04
Terminal block wiring
The following diagram illustrates the wiring ( see page 133 ) of the terminal.
276
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX DMS 16S44
35008167 12/2018
The TBX DMS 16S44 distributed input/output module Chapter 26
The TBX DMS 16S44 distributed input/output module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX DMS 16S44 module, its characteristics and terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX DMS 16S44 module
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 16S44
Connecting the module TBX DMS 16S44
Page
35008167 12/2018
277
TBX DMS 16S44
Introduction to the TBX DMS 16S44 module
General
The TBX DMS 16S44 is a modular base unit comprising 8 120 V DC inputs, compatible with 2 wire
CENELEC proximity sensors and 8 120 VA triac outputs. The module is equipped with a terminal block for direct wiring of the sensors and preactuators, which can be removed when it is switched off.
The sensor voltage and preactuator voltage are monitored to ensure that there is sufficient voltage for the inputs to operate correctly and for coherent processing of the outputs.
The inputs of this module have functions tasks in the application.
( see page 320 ) which, in certain cases, are common to a
group of channels. Thus, it is possible to assign the 2 channel groups of the module to the various
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX DMS 16S44
Nominal voltage
Supply voltage
Nominal frequencies
Frequency range
120 V AC
93 at 132 V AC
50 / 60 Hz
47 to 63 Hz
Current drawn for the module power supply 60 mA typically
75 mA typically Current drawn for the sensor supply
(loading 60 %)
Power dissipated at nominal load in the module
(loading 60 %)
6 W
Dielectric strength between inputs and ground (GND)
Isolation resistance
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 MΩ below 500 V DC
278
35008167 12/2018
Characteristics of the inputs/outputs of module TBX DMS 16S44
General characteristics of the inputs
This table presents the characteristics of the inputs of module TBX DMS 16S44:
Module TBX DMS 16S44
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
Sensor power supply
(including ripple)
Voltage for ON state
Current at 74 V
Voltage for OFF state
Current for OFF state
Input impedance
Switch-on time
(change from 0 to 1)
Switch-off time
(change from 1 to 0)
Permitted line resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted line resistance (volt-free contact)
Permitted leakage resistance (2 wire proximity sensor)
Permitted leakage resistance (volt-free contact)
IEC standard 1131
Compatibility with CENELEC 2 wire proximity sensors
Type of input
Type of logic
Sensor common
120 V AC
15 mA
93 at 132 V AC
>74 V
6 mA
< 20 V
< 4 mA
10 kΩ
5 ms
5 ms
< 100 Ω
< 500 Ω
> 100 Ω
> 30 Ω
Type 2
Yes
Capacitive
Positive
At the supply phase
TBX DMS 16S44
35008167 12/2018
279
TBX DMS 16S44
General characteristics of the outputs
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX DMS 16S44:
Module TBX DMS 16S44
Nominal voltage
Nominal current at 25 °C
Frequency
Supply voltage limits
Current at 60 °C
Peak current at switch-on
Voltage for ON state
Voltage for OFF state
Leakage current at OFF state
Residual voltage at ON state
Switching time at ON state
Switching time at OFF state
120 V AC
1 A
50/60 Hz
93 at 132 V AC
0,5 A
12 A (1 cycle)
> 80 V
< 20 V
< 3 mA
< 1,5 V
≤ 80 ms
≤ 20 ms
Protection against overloads and short-circuits Yes: internal fuse
Protection against inductive overvoltages
Conforms to IEC 1131
No, (provide an RC or GMOV)
Yes
Compatible with DC inputs
Type of logic
Sensor common
Isolation between channels or groups of channels and internal bus
No
Positive
At the supply phase
1500 V rms. 50 - 60 Hz
280
35008167 12/2018
Connecting the module TBX DMS 16S44
Terminal block wiring
The following diagram illustrates the wiring ( see page 133 ) of the terminal.
TBX DMS 16S44
35008167 12/2018
281
TBX DMS 16S44
282
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX AES 400
35008167 12/2018
The TBX AES 400 distributed input module Chapter 27
The TBX AES 400 distributed input module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX AES 400 module, its characteristics and terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX AES 400 module
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX AES 400
Connecting the module TBX AES 400
Wiring example for the TBX AES 400 module
Wiring and installation recommendations for the model TBX AES 400
Page
35008167 12/2018
283
TBX AES 400
Introduction to the TBX AES 400 module
General
The TBX AES 400 base unit is an analog input module with 4 multirange isolated channels. It must be used with a TBX LEP 030 communicator.
This module can provide each input with the following ranges:
high level voltage, high level current, thermocouples (B,E,J,K,N,R,S,T), temperature probes (Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000).
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX AES 400
Supply voltage +SV
Nominal voltage +SV
Current drawn at +SV by the AES used as a basic module (1)
Additional current drawn from a basic module when the AES module is used as an extension
Current drawn at +SV by the AES used as an extension
Isolation
19,2 to 60 V
24 V
130 mA typically
190 mA max.
negligible
130 mA typically
190 mA max.
48 V
75 mA typically
105 mA max.
75 mA typically
105 mA max.
between channels 500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min between channels and ground (GND)
500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min between channel and supply between ground and supply
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Permissible common mode voltage between channel and ground and between channels during operation
+ or - 100 V continuous or 75 Vrms.
Key:
(1) In terms of consumption, do not forget to consider the current drawn at +SV by the TBX LEP 030 communication
from the basic module.
284
35008167 12/2018
TBX AES 400
Characteristics of the inputs of module TBX AES 400
Specific characteristics: electrical range
This table presents the characteristics specific to the electrical ranges:
Electrical ranges (1) + or -10 V + or -5 V 0/20 mA
4/20 mA
Full scale (FS) 10 V
Typical error at 25 °C in % FS 0.05 %
5 V
0.05 %
20 mA
0.13 %
0.16 %
Typical error at 60 °C in % FS 0.29 % 0.26 % 0.24 %
0.30 %
+ or -
500 mV
500 mV
0.05 %
0.24 %
+ or -
200 mV
200 mV
0.05 %
0.18 %
+ or -
50 mV
50 mV
0.11 %
0.47 %
+ or
20 mV
20 mV
0.13 %
0.63 %
Key:
(1) The values cover the entire input dynamic range. They are valid 5 mins after switchon of the assembly TBX AES 400 and TBX LEP 030 for the ranges 20 mV and
50 mV.
Specific characteristics: thermocouple ranges
This table presents the characteristics specific to the thermocouple ranges:
E J K N R Thermocouple range
Input dynamic (1)
B
°C 0/1802
°F 32/3276
Typical error at 25 °C (2)
Typical error at 60 °C (2)
°C
°F
2,0
3,6
°C 5,0
°F 9,0
S T
-270/685 -210/895 -270/1266 -270/1300 -50/1697 -50/1769 -270/400
-454/1265 -346/1643 -454/2310 -454/2372 -58/3086 -58/3216 -454/752
1,0
1,8
1,2
2,2
1,3
2,4
1,2
2,2
1,4
2,5
1,5
2,7
2,0
1,8
1,9
3,4
2,3
4,1
2,8
5,0
2,5
4,5
4,0
7,2
4,4
7,9
2,1
3,8
Key:
(1)
(2)
The dynamic is expressed at an ambient temperature of 25 °C.
The values include cold junction compensation. They are given for the middle of the range and in a
preferential installation ( see page 293
TBX LEP 030 have been powered up.
. They are guaranteed 15 mins after the TBX AES 400 and
35008167 12/2018
285
TBX AES 400
Specific characteristics: temperature probe ranges
This table presents the characteristics specific to the temperature probe ranges:
Temperature probe range
Input dynamic
Typical error at 25 °C (1)
Typical error at 60 °C (1)
Current for temperature probe
°C
°F
°C
°F
°C
°F
Pt100
-200/850
-328/1562
1,2
2,2
1,8
3,2
500 μA direct
2,2
1,8
3,2
Pt1000
-200/850
-328/1562
1,2
0,9
0,8
1,4
Ni1000
-60/250
-76/482
0,5
Key:
(1) The values are given for the middle of the dynamic range.
Common characteristics
This table presents the common characteristics of the inputs of module TBX AES 400:
Module TBX AES 400
Resolution
Acquisition time of the 4 channels
Rejection 50/60 Hz series mode common mode
Type de conversion
Input impedance
External resistance
Permissible overload voltage current
Digital filtering
Automatic
Life cycle of relays
12 bits + sign
400 ms (mode 50 Hz)
50 dB
> 90 dB for + or - 10 V
340 ms (mode 60 Hz)
> 130 dB for + or - 20 mV
Double ramp integration
> 1,5 MΩ
250 Ω in parallel at input (for current range)
+ or - 30 V
+ or - 25 mA
Type de conversion linearization
> 55000 hours in mode 50 Hz
> 47000 hours in mode 60 Hz
286
35008167 12/2018
Maximum error
Key:
(1)
(2)
TBX AES 400 at 25 °C, in % FS (2) at 60 °C, in % FS (2)
High level (1)
0,23 %
0,99 %
Low level (1)
0,90 %
1,69 %
High level: ranges 10 V, 5 V, 0/20 mA, 4/20 mA, 500 mV, 200 mV,
Low level: ranges 20 mV, 50 mV, B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, Pt100, Pt1000 and Ni1000.
Precision at low level covers the whole 20 mV, 50 mV range, the middle of the range for
Pt100, Pt1000 and Ni1000, with any orientation, and the middle of the range for all thermocouples.
35008167 12/2018
287
TBX AES 400
Connecting the module TBX AES 400
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for the module TBX AES 400.
288
NOTE: the terminals + R• and - R• are a repetition of terminals + I• and - I• , and enable the shunt to be connected for the ranges 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA.
35008167 12/2018
TBX AES 400
The terminals 0/1,1/2, 2/3 enable the daisy chaining of power supplies to resistive probes
closed on -Is.
Terminal block wiring
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
.
1 Inputs to be used for the wiring of temperature probes.
35008167 12/2018
289
TBX AES 400
Wiring example for the TBX AES 400 module
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for the module TBX AES 400.
290
35008167 12/2018
Terminal block wiring example
The following table shows the terminal block wiring example.
Terminal block wiring
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Pt 100, 4 wires
Pt 100, 2 wires
4/20 mA
+ or -10 V
TBX AES 400
35008167 12/2018
291
TBX AES 400
The following table shows the terminal block wiring
example.
292
35008167 12/2018
TBX AES 400
Wiring and installation recommendations for the model TBX AES 400
Wiring recommendations
To protect the signal from induced external noise in serial mode and noise in common mode, it is advisable to take the following precautions regarding:
Precautions to take
Type of conductors
Use screened twisted pairs, with a minimum conductor cross-section of 0.28 mm 2 .
Cable screening Connect the cable screening to the shortest TBX module ground on the TBX GND 015 grounding strip.
Arrangement of the conductors in cables
Cable routing
Multipair cables can be rearranged for signals of a similar type which have the same reference to ground.
Sensor reference to ground
Sensor reference to ground
(continued)
Keep the measurement wires separate from the discrete I/O cables (in particular from relay outputs) and from power cables.
The TBX AES 400 has 4 inputs which are isolated from the PLC bus and from each other.
This double isolation means that sensors of different voltages can be used.
For safety reasons, a grounding network (15 MΩ//4.7 nF) is provided for each channel. This network causes a leakage current if the sensor is referenced to ground.
Use of floating sensors (recommended mounting - with no reference to ground): an internal network for each channel grounds the cold points of the sensors.
35008167 12/2018
293
TBX AES 400
Precautions to take
Sensor reference to ground
(continued)
Use of sensors referenced to ground:
If the following characteristics are respected, then each sensor can be assigned a voltage rate according to ground:
must be lower than the safety voltage setting a reference voltage from a sensor point will cause a leakage current to be generated. If several analog TBX modules are used, measure the total leakage current and check that it will not interfere with the application. The RC grounding network has a value of 15 MΩ,
4.7 nF, for a 48 volt reference voltage, in relation to ground, with a current of
3.8 mA being created.
294
35008167 12/2018
TBX AES 400
Specific cases
The following table describes the precautions to be taken in the specific case of thermocouple, current, and temperature probe inputs.
Specific cases Precautions to take
Thermocouple inputs
The thermocouple/terminal block connections must be carried out using compensation cables adapted to the type of thermocouple.
Preferential installations for thermocouple measurements are the following:
standard convection with an ambient temperature gradient of < 5 °C/hour:
The TBX AES 400 will be mounted horizontally uninsulated as a base and/or as an extension with a minimum clearance of
150 mm in height (D) and 100 mm in width (d).
The best results are obtained at an ambient temperature of 25 °C
module supply voltage must be 24 V DC.
standard or forced convection with an ambient temperature gradient of > 5 °C/hour: the TBX AES 400 will be horizontally mounted as a base in an AC1-GV 263016 enclosure. The guaranteed performances are the same as in the case for standard convection with an ambient temperature gradient of < 5 °C/hour.
The module supply voltage must be 24 V DC.
Current inputs When the input signal is a current of 0/20 mA or 4/2 0mA, it is necessary to connect a resistance of
250 Ω - 0.1 % - 1/2 Ω - 25 ppm / °C (TSX AAK2 : packs of 4 resistors) to terminals R+ and R- which are assigned to the channel.
35008167 12/2018
295
TBX AES 400
Specific cases Precautions to take
Temperature probe inputs
2 or 4 wire temperature probes may be used.
For Pt100 2 wire probes, the probe can be at a distance of 2.50 m without affecting the measurement (1) if cables with a 2 mm 2
For Pt1000/Ni1000 2 wire probes, the probe can be at a distance of 25 m without affecting the measurement (1) if cables with a 2 mm 2
cross-section are used.
cross-section are used.
Channels 0, 1 and 2: 4-wire Pt100 probe.
Channel 3: 2-wire Pt100 probe.
Note: the current source is common to all temperature probes which are then mounted in series.
The diagram opposite shows how the connecting terminals facilitate 4 wire wiring.
A fault in the wiring of the current source or in one of the temperature probes will lead to there being a fault on all the channels, which will be seen as a
sensor connection fault ( see page 374 )
.
Key:
(1)
296
Beyond this, the wire resistance systematically causes an error which can be corrected by the sensor
alignment procedure ( see page 378 )
.
CAUTION
DEGRADATION OF PERFORMANCES
Any use which does not respect the thermocouple input recommendations (orientation, ambience, module power supply) will result in a degradation of performances of the
TBX AES 400. However, in stable ambient temperature conditions, it is possible to reduce error by carrying out a sensor alignment
.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX ASS 200
35008167 12/2018
The TBX ASS 200 distributed output module Chapter 28
The TBX ASS 200 distributed output module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX ASS 200 module, its characteristics and the terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX ASS 200 module
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX ASS 200
Connecting the module TBX ASS 200
Wiring and installation recommendations for the model TBX ASS 200
Page
35008167 12/2018
297
TBX ASS 200
Introduction to the TBX ASS 200 module
General
The TBX ASS 200 base unit is an analog output module which has 2 isolated channels. It must be used with a TBX LEP 030 communicator.
This module can provide each output with the following ranges:
voltage: + or - 10 V, current: 0/20 mA and 4/20 mA.
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX AMS 200
Supply voltage +SV
Nominal voltage +SV
Current drawn at +SV by the ASS used as a basic module (1)
Additional current drawn from a basic module when the ASS module is used as an extension
Current drawn at +SV by the ASS used as an extension
Isolation
19,2 V DC to 60 V DC
24 V DC
180 mA typically
257 mA max.
15 mA typically
23 mA max.
162 mA typically
202 mA max.
48 V DC
92 mA typically
132 mA max.
8 mA typically
12 mA max.
84 mA typically
104 mA max.
between channels 1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min between channels and ground (GND)
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min between channel and supply
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Key:
(1) In terms of consumption, do not forget to consider the current drawn at +SV by the TBX LEP 030 communication
from the basic module.
298
35008167 12/2018
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX ASS 200
General characteristics
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX ASS 200:
Module TBX ASS 200
Number of channels
Range
2
+ or -10V
Full scale (FS)
Resolution
LSB
Load impedance
Maximum error
Maximum drift
Update period
Continuous overvoltage
Monotonicity
Maximum leakage current at 25 °C at 60 °C
10 V
11 bits + sign
4,88 mV
≥ 1 kΩ
0,45 % FS
0,75 % FS
65 ppm (PE) / °C
5 ms
-
+ or - 30 V
Yes
0/20 mA
0/40 mA
20 mA
11 bits
9,76 μA
≤ 600 Ω
0,52 % FS
0,98 % FS
103 ppm (PE) / °C
50 μA (0/20 mA)
TBX ASS 200
35008167 12/2018
299
TBX ASS 200
Connecting the module TBX ASS 200
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for the module TBX ASS 200.
300
35008167 12/2018
Terminal block wiring
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
.
TBX ASS 200
35008167 12/2018
301
TBX ASS 200
Wiring and installation recommendations for the model TBX ASS 200
Wiring recommendations
To protect the signal from induced external noise in serial mode and noise in common mode, it is advisable to take the following precautions regarding:
Precautions to take
Type of conductors
Use screened twisted pairs, with a minimum conductor cross-section of 0.28 mm 2 .
Cable screening Connect the cable screening to the shortest TBX module ground on the TBX GND 015 grounding strip.
Arrangement of the conductors in cables
Cable routing
Multipair cables can be rearranged for signals of a similar type which have the same reference to ground.
Preactuator reference to ground
Keep the measurement wires separate from the discrete I/O cables (in particular from relay outputs) and from power cables.
Note: There are no technical restrictions in referencing the preactuators to ground. However, for safety reasons, it is advisable to avoid using a ground voltage which is some distance from the terminal, as this ground voltage may be very different from the nearby ground voltage. Distributed
I/O modules minimize this risk as they are usually close to the process.
Recommended voltage and current wiring: It is recommended to use preactuators with no reference to ground.
channel 0 (voltage) channel 1 (current)
302
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX AMS 620
35008167 12/2018
The TBX AMS 620 distributed input/output module Chapter 29
The TBX AMS 620 distributed input/output module
Subject of this chapter
This chapter presents the TBX AMS 620 module, its characteristics and terminal wiring.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the TBX AMS 620 module
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX AMS 620
Connecting the module TBX AMS 620
Wiring and installation recommendations for the model TBX AMS 620
Page
35008167 12/2018
303
TBX AMS 620
Introduction to the TBX AMS 620 module
General
The module TBX AMS 620 is a module with 6 non-isolated high level analog inputs and 2 isolated outputs. It must be used with a TBX LEP 030 communicator. This module can be used as a basic module or as an extension.
This module can provide each input with the following ranges:
high level voltage: 0/5 V -10 V, high level current: 0/20 mA and -4/20 mA, and the inputs on this module have the following ranges:
high level voltage: 10 V, high level current: 0/20 mA and -4/20 mA.
Technical specifications
The following table provides the technical specifications of the module.
TBX AMS 620
Supply voltage +SV
Nominal voltage +SV
Current drawn at +SV by the AMS used as a basic module (1)
Additional current drawn from a basic module when the
AMS module is used as an extension
Isolation
19,2 to 60 V
24 V
224 mA typically
321 mA max.
59 mA typically
87 mA max.
Current drawn at +SV by the AMS used as an extension 162 mA typically
202 mA max.
between input channels non isolated
48 V
114 mA typically
164 mA max.
30 mA typically
44 mA max.
84 mA typically
104 mA max.
between output channels 500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min between channels and ground (GND) between channel and supply
1500 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Permissible common mode voltage between channel and ground and between channels during operation
150 V rms - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Key:
(1) In terms of consumption, do not forget to consider the current drawn at
+SV by the TBX LEP 030 communication module basic module.
from the
304
35008167 12/2018
TBX AMS 620
Characteristics of the outputs of module TBX AMS 620
General characteristics of the inputs
This table presents the characteristics of the inputs of module TBX AMS 620:
Module TBX AMS 620
Number of channels
Electrical range
Full scale (FS)
Resolution
LSB
Converter
Maximum error
6
+ or -10 V
10 V
11 bits + sign
5,13 mV
0/5 V
5 V
12 bits
1,30 mV by successive approximation
0,2 % FS
0,26 % FS
0,15 % FS
0,22 % FS
0/20 mA
20 mA
12 bits
4,97 μA at 25 °C at 60 °C
Temperature drift
Impedance
Time to read
20 ppm (FS) °C
10 MΩ
5,3 ms
15 ppm (FS) °C
10 MΩ
6 channels 42.4 ms
Permissible overload voltage + or -30 V DC (voltage range)
Digital filtering
Linearization
Monotonocity one channel current 30 mA ; + or -7.9 V (current range)
1° order with configurable time constant automatic
Yes
0,25 % FS
0,43 % FS
40 ppm (FS) °C
250 MΩ
4/20 mA
20 mA
12 bits
4,97 μA
0,25 % FS
0,43 % FS
40 ppm (FS) / °C
250 MΩ
35008167 12/2018
305
TBX AMS 620
General characteristics of the outputs
This table presents the characteristics of the outputs of module TBX AMS 620:
Module TBX AMS 620
Number of channels
Range
2
+ or -10V
Full scale (FS)
Resolution
LSB
Load impedance
Maximum error
Maximum drift
Update period
Continuous overvoltage
Monotonicity
Maximum leakage current at 25 °C at 60 °C
10 V
11 bits + sign
4,88 mV
≥ 1 kΩ
0,45 % FS
0,75 % FS
65 ppm (FS) / °C
5 ms
-
+ or - 30 V
Yes
0/20 mA
0/40 mA
20 mA
11 bits
9,76 μA
≤ 600 Ω
0,52 % FS
0,98 % FS
103 ppm (FS) / °C
50 μA (0/20 mA)
306
35008167 12/2018
Connecting the module TBX AMS 620
Circuit diagram
The following illustration shows the circuit diagram for the module TBX AMS 620.
TBX AMS 620
35008167 12/2018
307
TBX AMS 620
NOTE: to use an input channel in current, the I and R terminals must be connected to the channel concerned.
All terminals referenced COM are connected in the module interior.
308
35008167 12/2018
Terminal block wiring
The following diagram illustrates the wiring of the terminal.
.
TBX AMS 620
1 The current-voltage conversion resistances are incorporated in the base unit (and therefore require no external resistance).
35008167 12/2018
309
TBX AMS 620
Wiring and installation recommendations for the model TBX AMS 620
Wiring recommendations
To protect the signal from induced external noise in serial mode and noise in common mode, it is advisable to take the following precautions regarding:
Precautions to take
Type of conductors
Use screened twisted pairs, with a minimum conductor cross-section of 0.28 mm 2 .
Cable screening
Connect the cable screening to the shortest TBX module ground on the TBX GND 015 grounding strip.
Arrangement of the conductors in cables
Cable routing
Multipair cables can be rearranged for signals of a similar type which have the same reference to ground.
Preactuator and sensor reference to ground
Keep the measurement wires separate from the discrete I/O cables (in particular from relay outputs) and from power cables.
The TBX AMS 620 module has 6 inputs which are not isolated from each other but which are isolated from the PLC bus, and 2 outputs which are isolated from each other and from the PLC bus.
The sensor cold points are connected to each other internally by the Com terminals.
To ensure good immunity to high frequency interference, a 4.7 nF capacitor is connected between the channel voltage and the ground.
To ensure correct operation of the analog measurement system, the following precautions must be taken:
The sensors must be in close proximity to
each other (several meters apart).
All sensors must be referenced at the same point. This point is then connected to the terminal ground.
Note: There are no technical restrictions in referencing the preactuators to ground.
However, for safety reasons, it is advisable to avoid using a ground voltage which is some distance from the terminal, as this ground voltage may be very different from the nearby ground voltage. Distributed I/O modules minimize this risk as they are usually close to the process.
310
35008167 12/2018
Precautions to take
Sensor reference to ground
If the following characteristics are respected, then each sensor can be assigned a voltage rate according to ground:
The sensors must be in close proximity to
each other (several meters apart).
all sensors are referenced to the same point.
This point is then connected to the COM terminal on the terminal block.
Preactuator reference to ground
Recommended voltage and current wiring:
It is advisable to use preactuators which are not referenced with respect to ground, with each channel reference being connected to the ground via a 4.7 nF capacitor.
TBX AMS 620
35008167 12/2018
311
TBX AMS 620
Precautions to take
Preactuator reference to ground (cont.)
Possible voltage wiring:
The preactuators can be referenced to ground if the modules have voltage outputs and if the following precautions are taken:
The common mode voltages must be below the safety voltage (48 V peak),
Connecting a point in the preactuator to a reference voltage causes a leakage current to be generated. If several analog modules are used, measure the total leakage current and check that it will not interfere with the application.
312
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX Discrete
35008167 12/2018
Software Installation of Remote Discrete Input/Output Modules on the Fipio Bus Part II
Software Installation of Remote Discrete Input/Output Modules on the Fipio Bus
Subject of this Part
This part presents the Discrete input/output TBX modules, and describes their installation using
Control Expert software.
What Is in This Part?
This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter
30
31
32
33
34
Chapter Name
General Introduction to the Discrete Application -Specific Function Applied to
Remote TBX Modules
Discrete Application Configuration
Presentation of Discrete Application Language Objects
Debug of the TBX Remote Input/Output Modules
Diagnostics of the Remote Input/Output Discrete TBX Modules
Page
35008167 12/2018
313
TBX Discrete
314
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
General introduction
35008167 12/2018
General Introduction to the Discrete Application -Specific Function Applied to Remote TBX Modules Chapter 30
General Introduction to the Discrete Application -Specific
Function Applied to Remote TBX Modules
Overview
Introduction
The software installation for the modules is carried out from the various Control Expert editors:
In offline mode,
In online mode.
The following order of installation phases is recommended but it is possible to change the order of certain phases (for example, starting with the configuration phase).
Installation Phases with Processor
The following table shows the various phases of installation with the processor.
Phase
Declaration of variables
Programming
Configuration
Association
Generation
Transfer
Adjustment /
Debugging
Documentation
Description
Declaration of IODDT-type variables for the application-specific modules and variables of the project.
Project programming.
Declaration of modules.
Module channel configuration.
Entry of configuration parameters.
Association of IODDTs with the channels configured (variable editor).
Project generation (analysis and editing of links).
Transfer project to PLC.
Project debugging from debug screens, animation tables.
Modifying the program and adjustment parameters.
Building documentation file and printing miscellaneous information relating to the project.
Mode
Offline (1)
Offline (1)
Offline
Offline (1)
Offline
Online
Online
Online (1)
35008167 12/2018
315
General introduction
Phase Description
Operation/Diagnostic Displaying miscellaneous information necessary for supervisory control of the project.
Diagnostic of project and modules.
Mode
Online
Key:
(1) These various phases can also be performed in the other mode.
316
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Discrete Application Configuration
35008167 12/2018
Discrete Application Configuration Chapter 31
Discrete Application Configuration
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter describes the Configuration aspect of the installation of the Discrete application applied to remote TBX modules.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following sections:
Section
31.1
31.2
31.3
Topic
Configuration of a Remote TBX Input/Output Module: General
Discrete Input/Output Channel Parameters
Configuration of Discrete Module Parameters
Page
35008167 12/2018
317
Discrete Application Configuration
Configuration of a Remote TBX Input/Output Module: General Section 31.1
Configuration of a Remote TBX Input/Output Module: General
Description of the Discrete Remote Module Configuration Screen
At a Glance
The module configuration screen, selected on the Fipio bus, displays the parameters associated with the Discrete input or output channels
Illustration
The figure below represents a configuration screen.
318
35008167 12/2018
Discrete Application Configuration
Description
The following table shows the various elements of the configuration screen and their functions.
2
3
Number Element
1 Tabs
4
5
Module area
Channel area
General parameters area
Function
The tab in the foreground indicates the mode in progress
(Configuration in this example). Every mode can be selected using the respective tab. The available modes are:
Configuration,
Debugging, accessible only in online mode.
Gives a reminder of the device’s shortened name.
Is used:
By clicking on the reference number, to display the tabs:
Description which gives the characteristics of the device.
I/O Objects (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Operating Modes) which is used to presymbolize the input/output objects.
Fault, which shows the device faults (in online mode only).
By clicking on the Channel, to select the channel or group of channels (maximum 8) to configure.
To the right of the Channel is the Symbol. This is the name of the channel defined by the user (using the variable editor).
This area is used to define the task (MAST or FAST) in which the channel implicit exchange objects will be exchanged.
According to the type of Fipio device configured, it is also possible to adjust:
The channel filtering,
The fallback mode,
The reactivation.
Configuration area This area is used to set up the devices.
35008167 12/2018
319
Discrete Application Configuration
Discrete Input/Output Channel Parameters Section 31.2
Discrete Input/Output Channel Parameters
Subject of this Section
This section introduces the different input and output channel parameters of remote input/output
TBX modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Parameters of the Remote TBX Discrete Inputs on the Fipio Bus
Parameters of the Remote 8-, 10- or 12-Channel TBX Discrete Outputs on the Fipio Bus
Parameters of the Remote 16-Channel TBX Discrete Outputs on the Fipio Bus
Page
320
35008167 12/2018
Discrete Application Configuration
Parameters of the Remote TBX Discrete Inputs on the Fipio Bus
At a Glance
The Discrete TBX inputs on the Fipio bus feature parameters for each channel, each group of 8 channels, or for all channels.
Parameters
The table below shows the parameters available for each TBX discrete input module.
Module reference No. of inputs Filtering
TBX CEP 1622
TBX DES 1622
TBX DES 1633
TBX EEP 1622
TBX DMS 1025
TBX DMS 1625
TBX DES 16S04
TBX DMS 16S44
TBX DMS 16P22
TBX DES 16C22
TBX EEP 08C22
TBX DMS 16C22
TBX DMS 16C222
TBX DES 16F22
16
16
16
16
8 (inputs)
8 (inputs)
16
(1)
8 (inputs)
16
16
8
8
16
Associated task
(for the module)
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Normal /
Fast
-
-
-
-
-
-
Latching (per channel)
-
-
-
-
-
-
Wire test (per channel)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Active / Inactive (2)
-
Active / Inactive (2)
Active / Inactive (2)
-
Active / Inactive (2) -
Active / Inactive (2)
Legend:
(1)
(2)
8 input channels + 8 programmable input/output channels.
Check box.
NOTE: Parameters in bold correspond to the parameters configured by default.
35008167 12/2018
321
Discrete Application Configuration
Parameters of the Remote 8-, 10- or 12-Channel TBX Discrete Outputs on the Fipio
Bus
At a Glance
The 8-, 10- or 12-channel Discrete TBX output modules feature parameters for each channel, each group of 8 channels, or for all channels.
Parameters
The table below shows the parameters available for each remote 8-, 10- or 12-channel TBX
Discrete output module on the Fipio bus.
Module reference
TBX ESP 08C22
TBX DSS 1235
TBX DMS 1025
No. of outputs
8
12
Associated task
(for the module)
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
2 (outputs) Mast / Fast -
-
Reset (group of
8 channels)
Automatic/
Programmed
Fallback mode (group of 8 channels)
Fallback /
Maintain
Fallback /
Maintain
Fallback /
Maintain
0 / 1
Fallback value
(per channel)
0 / 1
0 / 1
Wire test
(per channel)
-
Active /
Inactive (1)
-
Legend:
(1) Check box.
NOTE: Parameters in bold correspond to the parameters configured by default.
322
35008167 12/2018
Discrete Application Configuration
Parameters of the Remote 16-Channel TBX Discrete Outputs on the Fipio Bus
At a Glance
The 16-channel Discrete TBX output modules feature parameters for each channel, each group of
8 channels, or for all channels.
Parameters
The table below shows the parameters available for each remote 16-channel TBX Discrete output module on the Fipio bus.
Module reference No. of outputs Associated task
(for the module)
TBX CSP 1625
TBX DSS 1622
TBX ESP 1622
TBX DSS 16C22
TBX DMS 16C22
TBX CSP 1622
TBX DSS 1625
TBX DMS 1625
TBX DMS 16S44
TBX DMS 16P22
16
16
16
16
16
TBX DMS 16C222 16
16
16
8 (outputs)
8 (outputs)
(1)
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
Mast / Fast
-
-
-
Automatic /
Programmed
Automatic /
Programmed
Automatic /
Programmed
Automatic /
Programmed
-
Automatic /
Programmed
Automatic /
Programmed
Reset (group of
8 channels)
Fallback mode
(group of 8 channels)
-
Fallback /
Maintain
Fallback /
Maintain
Fallback /
Maintain
Fallback /
Maintain
-
Fallback /
Maintain
Automatic /
Programmed
Fallback /
Maintain
Fallback /
Maintain
Fallback /
Maintain
Fallback /
Maintain
-
Fallback value (per channel)
-
0 / 1
0 / 1
0 / 1
0 / 1
0 / 1
0 / 1
0 / 1
0 / 1
0 / 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Wire test (per channel)
Active /
Inactive (2)
Active /
Inactive (2)
Active /
Inactive (2)
Legend:
(1)
(2)
8 programmable output channels.
Check box.
NOTE: Parameters in bold correspond to the parameters configured by default.
35008167 12/2018
323
Discrete Application Configuration
Configuration of Discrete Module Parameters Section 31.3
Configuration of Discrete Module Parameters
Subject of this Section
This section describes the implementation of the different configuration parameters for remote input/output TBX modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
How to Configure Programmable Channels for the TBX DMS 16P22 Module
How to Modify the Task Parameter of a Remote Discrete Module
How to Modify the Wiring Check Parameter of a Discrete TBX Module
How to Modify the Filtering Parameter of a Discrete Input Module
How to Modify the Latch Parameter of a Discrete Input Module
How to Modify the Fallback Mode Parameter for a Discrete Output TBX Module
How to modify the Reactivation of Outputs Parameter of a Discrete TBX module.
Page
324
35008167 12/2018
Discrete Application Configuration
How to Configure Programmable Channels for the TBX DMS 16P22 Module
At a Glance
The TBX DMS 16P22 module has, in addition to its 8 input channels, 8 extra channels that can be individually configured as input or output channels.
These make it possible for a single base to have 16 inputs, or from 1 to 8 outputs and 15 to
8 inputs. By default, the base is configured with all 16 channels set to input.
The power supply (+ and -) of the sensors and pre-actuators is shared.
NOTE: It is not possible to reconfigure channel types in online mode.
Illustration
The following illustration shows the configuration screen of the TBX DMS 16P22 module.
35008167 12/2018
325
Discrete Application Configuration
Procedure
The following table shows the procedure to configure the programmable channels of the
TBX DMS 16P22 module.
Step
1
2
3
4
Action
Access the module’s hardware configuration screen.
Select, in the channel area, the second group of the channel.
Select the tab Configuration: Programmable.
In the configuration area, individually configure the channels as inputs or outputs using the drop-down list in the Type column.
326
35008167 12/2018
Discrete Application Configuration
How to Modify the Task Parameter of a Remote Discrete Module
At a Glance
This parameter defines the processor task in which inputs are acquired and outputs are updated.
For the base module and extension module, the task is defined for all channels per channel group.
The possible choices are as follows:
The MAST task,
The FAST task.
NOTE: This parameter can only be modified in offline mode.
Procedure
The table below shows the procedure for defining the type of task assigned to the channels of a module.
2
3
Step
1
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
In the channel area, select the required channel group.
In the General parameters area, click on the drop-down menu button in the Task field.
Result: a drop-down list appears.
4
5
Select the required task.
Confirm the reconfiguration if necessary.
35008167 12/2018
327
Discrete Application Configuration
How to Modify the Wiring Check Parameter of a Discrete TBX Module
At a Glance
This function is used to permanently check the quality of the link between:
Sensors and inputs,
Actuators and outputs.
The input wiring check function is used to permanently check the quality of the link between the sensors and the inputs of the TBX module. This function is used to detect the two main faults on a
Discrete input module:
Loosening of screws on the terminal block,
Short-circuit at the grounding of the cabling wires.
Modular Discrete TBX bases with input wiring check are fitted with 2 switches sensors.
, which must be configured by the user in order to make inputs compatible with the 2-wire proximity
With all static outputs protected against short-circuits of the 0 V or 24 V load and against overloads, the output wiring check function also performs a permanent open circuit detection function:
This detection is performed both when the pre-actuator is at idle (OFF) and triggered (ON).
NOTE: This parameter can be modified in online mode.
Procedure
The following table presents the procedure for activating or deactivating the Wiring check parameter.
2
3
Step
1
4
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
Select the required channel group in the channel area.
In the configuration area, click the checkbox in the Wiring check column of the channel to be configured.
Repeat the operation for every channel to be configured (from step 3).
328
35008167 12/2018
Discrete Application Configuration
How to Modify the Filtering Parameter of a Discrete Input Module
At a Glance
This parameter defines the filtering period for the selected channel.
The values proposed are:
0.7 ms (Fast) or
5.7 ms (Normal).
Procedure
The table below shows the procedure for defining the Filtering time parameter.
Step
1
2
3
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
In the channel area, select the required channel group.
In the General parameters area, click on the drop-down menu button in the
Filter field.
Result: one of the following scroll lists appears:
4 Select the required filtering period.
35008167 12/2018
329
Discrete Application Configuration
How to Modify the Latch Parameter of a Discrete Input Module
At a Glance
This parameter defines whether or not to acknowledge a positive pulse lasting less than the task period.
By default, acknowledgement is enabled (box checked).
Procedure
The table below shows the procedure for activating or deactivating the Latch function.
2
3
Step
1
4
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
In the channel area, select the required channel group.
In the configuration area, click the checkbox in the Latch column of the channel to be configured.
Repeat the operation for every channel to be configured (from step 3).
NOTE: This parameter can be modified in online mode.
330
35008167 12/2018
Discrete Application Configuration
How to Modify the Fallback Mode Parameter for a Discrete Output TBX Module
At a Glance
This parameter defines the fallback mode adopted by outputs when the PLC changes to Stop, in the event of a processor, rack or inter-rack cable fault.
The possible modes are as follows:
Mode
Fallback
Maintain
Meaning
The channels are set to 0 or 1 depending on the fallback value set for the group of 8 corresponding channels.
The outputs remain in the status they were in before switching to Stop.
WARNING
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR
Ensure that the extension module is connected to the base module via the connection cable, else the extension module outputs would not switch to fallback mode.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Procedure
The table below shows the procedure for defining the Fallback mode assigned to a group of channels.
Step
1
2
3
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
In the channel area, select the required channel group.
In the General parameters area, click on the drop-down menu button in the
Fallback mode field.
Result: a drop-down list appears.
35008167 12/2018
4
5
6
Select the required fallback mode.
For the Fallback mode, configure each channel of the selected group.
To do this, click on the drop-down menu button in the Fallback value column of the configuration area.
Click on the required value (0 or 1).
331
Discrete Application Configuration
How to modify the Reactivation of Outputs Parameter of a Discrete TBX module.
At a Glance
All 0.5 A and 2 A static outputs are equipped with a protection device enabling them, when an output is active, to detect an overload or short-circuit on its 0 V or 24 V load. Such faults limit the current of the output, make the module trip the output and indicate a fault.
For a tripped output to return to activity, it must first be reactivated.
The possible modes of the output reactivation parameter are as follows:
Mode
Programmed
Automatic
Meaning
Reactivation is executed by a PLC application command.
Caution: in order to avoid closely spaced, repetitive reactivation, the module automatically allows a period of 10 seconds between two reactivations.
Note: Having sent the channel reactivation command, a command must be sent with a zero value for the agent to remain in its programmed reactivation status.
Reactivation is carried out automatically every 10 seconds until the fault disappears.
The reactivation mode is defined per 8-channel group.
Procedure
The following table shows the procedure for defining the reactivation mode for the module’s output channels.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
In the channel area, select the required channel group.
In the General parameters area, click on the drop-down menu button in the
Reactivate field.
Result: a drop-down list appears.
3 Select the required type of reactivation.
332
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Language Objects
35008167 12/2018
Presentation of Discrete Application Language Objects Chapter 32
Presentation of Discrete Application Language Objects
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter describes the language objects associated with the Discrete application using different IODDTs.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following sections:
Section
32.1
32.2
Topic
Remote TBX Input/Output Module Language Objects and IODDTs
IODDTs of the TBX Remote Input/Output Modules
Page
35008167 12/2018
333
Language Objects
Remote TBX Input/Output Module Language Objects and IODDTs Section 32.1
Remote TBX Input/Output Module Language Objects and
IODDTs
Subject of this Section
This section presents general information about language objects and IODDTs of TBX Discrete modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Presentation of Language Objects of the Discrete Application Function Associated with Remote
Modules
Implicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application-Specific Function
Explicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application-Specific Function
Management of Exchanges and Reports with Explicit Objects
Page
334
35008167 12/2018
Language Objects
Presentation of Language Objects of the Discrete Application Function Associated with
Remote Modules
General
Discrete modules have different associated IODDTs.
The IODDTs are predefined by the manufacturer. They contain input/output language objects belonging to a channel of an application-specific module.
NOTE: IODDT variables can be created in two different ways:
Using the I/O objects
Using the Data Editor
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Operating Modes)
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Operating Modes)
tab,
.
There are four types of IODDT for TBX remote Discrete input/output modules:
T_DIS_IN_GEN ,
T_DIS_IN_FIP_STD ,
T_DIS_OUT_GEN ,
T_DIS_OUT_STD .
Language Object Types
Each IODDT contains a group of language objects which are used to control them and check their operation.
There are two types of language objects:
Implicit exchange objects, which are automatically exchanged on each cycle of the task associated with the module,
Explicit exchange objects, which are exchanged when requested to do so by the project, using explicit exchange instructions.
Implicit exchanges concern the module inputs/outputs: process value results, information and commands.
Explicit exchanges are used to set up the module's parameters and for module diagnostics.
35008167 12/2018
335
Language Objects
Implicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application-Specific Function
At a Glance
An integrated application-specific interface or the addition of a module automatically enhances the language objects application used to program this interface or module.
These objects correspond to the input/output images and software data of the module or integrated application-specific interface.
Reminders
The module inputs ( %I and %IW ) are updated in the PLC memory at the start of the task, the PLC being in RUN or STOP mode.
The outputs ( %Q and %QW ) are updated at the end of the task, only when the PLC is in RUN mode.
NOTE: When the task occurs in STOP mode, either of the following are possible, depending on the configuration selected:
outputs are set to fallback position (fallback mode) outputs are maintained at their last value (maintain mode)
Figure
The following diagram shows the operating cycle of a PLC task (cyclical execution).
336
35008167 12/2018
Language Objects
Explicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application-Specific Function
At a Glance
Explicit exchanges are exchanges performed at the user program's request, and using instructions:
READ_STS words)
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, I/O Management, Block Library)
WRITE_CMD
SAVE_PARAM adjustment parameters)
RESTORE_PARAM
(restore adjustment parameters)
(read status
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, I/O Management, Block Library) command words)
WRITE_PARAM adjustment parameters)
READ_PARAM
(write
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, I/O Management, Block Library)
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, I/O Management, Block Library) adjustment parameters)
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, I/O Management, Block Library)
(write
(read
(save
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, I/O Management, Block Library)
These exchanges apply to a set of %MW objects of the same type (status, commands or parameters) that belong to a channel.
NOTE: These objects provide information about the module (e.g., type of channel fault, etc.), and are used to control the modules and to define their operating modes (saving and restoring currently applied adjustment parameters).
35008167 12/2018
337
Language Objects
General Principle For Using Explicit Instructions
The diagram below shows the different types of explicit exchanges that can be made between the processor and module.
Managing exchanges
During an explicit exchange, it is necessary to check its performance in order that data is only taken into account when the exchange has been correctly executed.
To do this, two types of information are available:
information concerning the exchange in progress
the exchange report ( see page 342 )
The following diagram describes the management principle for an exchange:
338
NOTE: In order to avoid several simultaneous explicit exchanges for the same channel, it is necessary to test the value of the word EXCH_STS ( %MWr.m.c.0
) of the IODDT associated to the channel before to call any EF using this channel.
35008167 12/2018
Language Objects
Management of Exchanges and Reports with Explicit Objects
At a Glance
When data is exchanged between the PCL memory and the module, the module may require several task cycles to acknowledge this information. All IODDTs use two words to manage exchanges:
EXCH_STS (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0): exchange in progress
EXCH_RPT (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1): report
NOTE: Depending on the localization of the module, the management of the explicit exchanges
(%MW0.0.MOD.0.0 for example)will not be detected by the application:
For in-rack modules, explicit exchanges are done immediately on the local PLC Bus and are finished before the end of the execution task. So, the READ_STS , for example, is always finished
when the %MW0.0.MOD.0.0 bit is checked by the application.
For remote bus (Fipio for example), explicit exchanges are not synchronous with the execution task. So, the detection is possible by the application.
Illustration
The illustration below shows the different significant bits for managing exchanges:
35008167 12/2018
339
Language Objects
Description of the Significant Bits
Each bit of the words EXCH_STS (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0) and EXCH_RPT (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1) is associated with a type of parameter:
Rank 0 bits are associated with the status parameters:
The STS_IN_PROGR bit (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0.0) indicates whether a read request for the status
words is in progress.
The STS_ERR bit (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.0) specifies whether a read request for the status words is refused by the module channel.
Rank 1 bits are associated with the command parameters:
The CMD_IN_PROGR bit (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0.1) indicates whether command parameters are
being sent to the module channel.
The CMD_ERR bit (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.1) specifies whether the command parameters are refused by the module channel.
Rank 2 bits are associated with the adjustment parameters:
The ADJ_IN_PROGR bit (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0.2) indicates whether the adjustment parameters are being exchanged with the module channel (via WRITE_PARAM, READ_PARAM,
SAVE_PARAM, RESTORE_PARAM ).
The ADJ_ERR bit (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.2) specifies whether the adjustment parameters are refused by the module.
If the exchange is correctly executed, the bit is set to 0.
Rank 15 bits indicate a reconfiguration on channel c of the module from the console
(modification of the configuration parameters + cold start-up of the channel).
NOTE: m stands for the position of the module; c stands for the channel number in the module.
NOTE: Exchange and report words also exist at module level EXCH_STS (%MW\2.e\0.m.MOD) and EXCH_RPT (%MW\2.e\0.m.MOD.1) in the IODDT type T_GEN_MOD .
Example
Phase 1: Sending data by using the WRITE_PARAM instruction.
340
When the instruction is scanned by the PLC processor, the Exchange in progress bit is set to 1 in
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.
35008167 12/2018
Phase 2: Analysis of the data by the I/O module and report
Language Objects
When the data is exchanged between the PLC memory and the module, processing by the module is managed by the ADJ_ERR bit (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.2): Report (0 = correct exchange, 1 = faulty exchange).
NOTE: There is no adjustment parameter at module level.
Execution Indicators for an Explicit Exchange: EXCH_STS
The table below shows the control bits of the explicit exchanges: EXCH_STS (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0).
Standard symbol
STS_IN_PROGR
CMD_IN_PROGR
ADJ_IN_PROGR
RECONF_IN_PROGR
Type Access Meaning
BOOL R Reading of channel status words in progress
BOOL R Command parameters exchange in progress
BOOL R
BOOL R
Adjust parameters exchange in progress
Reconfiguration of the module in progress
Address
%MW\2.e\0m.c.0.0
%MW\2.e\0m.c.0.1
%MW\2.e\0m.c.0.2
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0.15
NOTE: If the module is not present or is disconnected, explicit exchange objects (Read_Sts for example) are not sent to the module (STS_IN_PROG (%MWr.m.c.0.0) = 0), but the words are refreshed.
35008167 12/2018
341
Language Objects
Explicit Exchange Report: EXCH_RPT
The table below shows the report bits: EXCH_RPT (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1).
Standard symbol
STS_ERR
CMD_ERR
ADJ_ERR
RECONF_ERR
Type Access Meaning
BOOL R Error in reading status words of the channel
(1 = failure)
BOOL R
BOOL R
Error when exchanging command parameters
(1 = failure)
Error when exchanging adjustment parameters
(1 = failure)
BOOL R Fault when reconfiguring the channel
(1 = failure)
Address
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.0
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.1
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.2
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.15
342
35008167 12/2018
IODDTs of the TBX Remote Input/Output Modules Section 32.2
IODDTs of the TBX Remote Input/Output Modules
Language Objects
Subject of this Section
This section presents the different IODDTs and language objects associated with the TBX remote input/output modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Details of T_DIS_IN_GEN-Type IODDT Implicit Exchange Objects
Details of T_DIS_IN_FIP_STD-Type IODDT Implicit Exchange Objects
Details of T_DIS_IN_FIP_STD-Type IODDT Explicit Exchange Objects
Details of the Implicit Exchange Objects of the IODDT of the T_DIS_OUT_GEN Type
Details of T_DIS_OUT_STD-Type IODDT Implicit Exchange Objects
Details of T_DIS_OUT_STD-Type IODDT Explicit Exchange Objects
Page
35008167 12/2018
343
Language Objects
Details of T_DIS_IN_GEN-Type IODDT Implicit Exchange Objects
At a Glance
This section presents implicit exchange objects of the T_DIS_IN_GEN -type IODDT applicable to all Discrete input modules.
Input Indicator
The following table presents the meaning of the VALUE bit (%I\2.e\0.m.c).
Standard symbol
VALUE
Type Access Meaning
EBOOL R Indicates for input channel c that the output of the sensor controlling the input is activated.
Number
%I\2.e\0.m.c
Error Bit
The following table presents the meaning of the error bit CH_ERROR (%I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR).
Standard symbol
CH_ERROR
Type
BOOL
Access Meaning
R Indicates that input channel c is faulty.
Number
%I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR
344
35008167 12/2018
Language Objects
Details of T_DIS_IN_FIP_STD-Type IODDT Implicit Exchange Objects
At a Glance
This section presents T_DIS_IN_FIP_STD -type IODDT implicit exchange objects applicable to input modules and the inputs of mixed Discrete modules (TBX, IP67).
Input Indicator
The following table presents the meaning of the VALUE bit (%I\2.e\0.m.c).
Standard symbol
VALUE
Type Access Meaning
EBOOL R Indicates for input channel c that the output of the sensor controlling the input is activated.
Number
%I\2.e\0.m.c
Error Bit
The following table presents the meaning of the error bit CH_ERROR (%I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR).
Standard symbol
CH_ERROR
Type
BOOL
Access Meaning
R Indicates that input channel c is faulty.
Number
%I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR
35008167 12/2018
345
Language Objects
Details of T_DIS_IN_FIP_STD-Type IODDT Explicit Exchange Objects
At a Glance
This section presents T_DIS_IN_FIP_STD -type IODDT explicit exchange objects applicable to input modules and the inputs of mixed Discrete modules (TBX, IP67). It includes the word type objects whose bits have a specific meaning. These objects are described in detail below.
Example of a declaration of a variable:
IODDT_VAR1 of the T_DIS_IN_FIP_STD type.
NOTE: In general, the meaning of the bits is given for bit status 1. In specific cases an explanation is given for each status of the bit.
NOTE: Not all bits are used.
Execution Indicators for an Explicit Exchange: EXCH_STS
The table below presents the meanings of the exchange control bits of the channel EXCH_STS
(%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0).
Standard symbol
STS_IN_PROGR
CMD_IN_PROGR
Type
BOOL
BOOL
Access Meaning
R Reading of channel status words in progress.
R Current command parameters exchange in progress.
Number
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0.0
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0.1
Explicit Exchange Report: EXCH_RPT
The table below presents the meaning of the exchange report bits EXCH_RPT (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1).
Standard symbol
STS_ERR
CMD_ERR
Type
BOOL
BOOL
Access Meaning
R Error in reading status words of the channel
(1 = failure).
R Error during a command parameter exchange (1 = failure).
Number
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.0
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.1
346
35008167 12/2018
Language Objects
Standard Channel Faults, CH_FLT
The table below shows the meaning of the bits of the status word CH_FLT (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2).
Reading is performed by a READ_STS ( IODDT_VAR1 ).
Standard symbol
TRIP
FUSE
BLK
EXT_PS_FLT
INTERNAL_FLT
CONF_FLT
COM_FLT
SHORT_CIRCUIT
LINE_FLT
Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Access Meaning
R External fault: tripping.
External fault: fuse.
Terminal block fault.
External supply fault.
Internal fault: module not operational.
Hardware or software configuration fault.
Communication fault with PLC.
External fault: short-circuit on a channel.
External fault: line fault.
Number
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.0
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.1
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.2
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.3
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.4
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.5
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.6
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.8
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.9
35008167 12/2018
347
Language Objects
Details of the Implicit Exchange Objects of the IODDT of the T_DIS_OUT_GEN Type
At a Glance
This section presents implicit exchange objects of the T_DIS_OUT_GEN -type IODDT applicable to
Discrete output modules.
Output Indicator
The following table presents the meaning of the VALUE bit (%Q\2.e\0.m.c).
Standard symbol
VALUE
Type Access Meaning
EBOOL R/W Indicates that output channel c is activated.
Number
%Q\2.e\0.m.c
Error Bit
The following table presents the meaning of the error bit CH_ERROR (%Ir.m.c.ERR).
Standard symbol
CH_ERROR
Type
BOOL
Access Meaning
R Indicates that output channel c is faulty.
Number
%I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR
348
35008167 12/2018
Language Objects
Details of T_DIS_OUT_STD-Type IODDT Implicit Exchange Objects
At a Glance
This section presents implicit exchange objects of the T_DIS_OUT_STD -type IODDT applicable to
Discrete output modules.
Output Indicator
The following table presents the meaning of the VALUE bit (%Q\2.e\0.m.c).
Standard symbol
VALUE
Type Access Meaning
EBOOL R/W Indicates that output channel c is activated.
Number
%Q\2.e\0.m.c
Error Bit
The following table presents the meaning of the error bit CH_ERROR (%I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR).
Standard symbol
CH_ERROR
Type
BOOL
Access Meaning
R Indicates that output channel c is faulty.
Number
%I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR
35008167 12/2018
349
Language Objects
Details of T_DIS_OUT_STD-Type IODDT Explicit Exchange Objects
At a Glance
This section presents explicit exchange objects of the T_DIS_OUT_STD -type IODDT applicable to
Discrete output modules. It includes the word type objects whose bits have a specific meaning.
These objects are described in detail below.
Example of a declaration of a variable:
IODDT_VAR1 of the T_DIS_OUT_STD type.
NOTE: In general, the meaning of the bits is given for bit status 1. In specific cases an explanation is given for each status of the bit.
NOTE: Not all bits are used.
Execution Indicators for an Explicit Exchange: EXCH_STS
The table below presents the meanings of the exchange control bits of the channel EXCH_STS
(%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0).
Standard symbol
STS_IN_PROGR
CMD_IN_PROGR
Type
BOOL
BOOL
Access Meaning
R Reading of channel status words in progress.
R Current command parameters exchange in progress.
Number
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0.0
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0.1
Explicit Exchange Report: EXCH_RPT
The table below presents the meaning of the exchange report bits EXCH_RPT (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1).
Standard symbol
STS_ERR
CMD_ERR
Type
BOOL
BOOL
Access Meaning
R Error in reading status words of the channel
(1 = failure).
R Error during a command parameter exchange (1 = failure).
Number
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.0
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.1
350
35008167 12/2018
Language Objects
Standard Channel Faults, CH_FLT
The table below shows the meaning of the bits of the status word CH_FLT (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2).
Reading is performed by a READ_STS ( IODDT_VAR1 ).
Standard symbol
TRIP
FUSE
BLK
EXT_PS_FLT
INTERNAL_FLT
CONF_FLT
COM_FLT
SHORT_CIRCUIT
LINE_FLT
Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Access Meaning
R External fault: tripping.
External fault: fuse.
Terminal block fault.
External supply fault.
Internal fault: module not operational.
Hardware or software configuration fault.
Communication fault with PLC.
External fault: short-circuit on a channel.
External fault: line fault.
Number
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.0
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.1
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.2
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.3
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.4
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.5
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.6
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.8
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.9
Status word: CH_CMD
The table below shows the meaning of the bits of the status word CH_CMD (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.3). The command is made by a WRITE_CMD ( IODDT_VAR1 )
Standard symbol
REAC_OUT
PS_CTRL_DIS
PS_CTRL_EN
Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Access Meaning
R/W Reactivation of tripped outputs (protected outputs).
R/W
R/W
Inhibition of the external supply control.
Validation of the external supply control.
Address
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.3.0
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.3.1
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.3.2
NOTE: This object is specific to output modules with reactivation.
35008167 12/2018
351
Language Objects
352
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Debug of the Discrete TBX Modules
35008167 12/2018
Debug of the TBX Remote Input/Output Modules Chapter 33
Debug of the TBX Remote Input/Output Modules
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter describes the debug function and commands for remote Discrete modules on a Fipio bus.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the Debug Function of a Remote Discrete Module
Description of the Debug Screen for a Discrete Remote Module
How to Access the Forcing/Unforcing Function
How to Access the SET and RESET Commands
Page
35008167 12/2018
353
Debug of the Discrete TBX Modules
Introduction to the Debug Function of a Remote Discrete Module
Introduction
The Debug function is used for each TBX Discrete input/output module present in the application:
To display the parameters of each of the channels (channel state, filtering vale, etc.),
To access the diagnostics and adjustment functions for the selected channel (channel forcing, channel masking, etc.).
The function also provides access to module diagnostics in the event of a fault.
NOTE: This function is only available in online mode.
NOTE: Access to the Debug function is limited to four Fipio device screens (TBX Discrete, TBX
Analog, IP67, etc.) opened simultaneously.
354
35008167 12/2018
Debug of the Discrete TBX Modules
Description of the Debug Screen for a Discrete Remote Module
At a Glance
The debug screen displays the value and state of each of the selected module's channels in real time. It is also used to access the channel commands (forcing of the input/output value, etc.).
Illustration
The figure below represents a debug screen.
35008167 12/2018
355
Debug of the Discrete TBX Modules
Description
The following table shows the different elements of the debug screen and their functions.
Number Element
1 Tabs
2
3
4
5
Module area
Channel area
General parameters area
Parameters in progress zone
Function
The tab in the foreground indicates the mode in progress (Debug in this example). Every mode can be selected using the respective tab.
Debug which can be accessed only in online mode.
Configuration.
Specifies the abbreviated heading of the module.
In the same area there are 3 LEDs which indicate the module’s operating mode:
RUN indicates the operating status of the module,
ERR indicates an internal fault in the module,
I/O indicates a fault from outside the module or an application fault.
Is used:
By clicking on the reference number, to display the tabs:
Description which gives the characteristics of the device,
I/O Objects (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Operating
Modes) which is used to presymbolize the input/output objects,
Fault which shows the device faults (in online mode).
By clicking on the Channel, to select the channel or group of channels (maximum 8) to debug. To the left of the symbol there is a copy of the CHx channel LED.
Gives a reminder of the channel setting:
Task: specifies the MAST or FAST task configured. This heading
is frozen.
Function: the Global Unforce provides direct access to the channels’ Global Unforce function.
This zone displays the state of the inputs and outputs, and the different parameters in progress.
For each of the channels, there are five columns:
The Symbol column displays the symbol associated with the
channel when it has been defined by the user (using the variable editor),
The State column displays the status of each of the module’s channels and enables their forcing,
The Type column for indicating the type (input or output),
The Fault column creates direct access to the diagnostics for each channel when these are faulty (indicated by the indicator lamp built into the diagnostics access button, which turns red),
The Applied Outputs column to indicate the output fallback
position.
356
35008167 12/2018
Debug of the Discrete TBX Modules
How to Access the Forcing/Unforcing Function
At a Glance
This function supports the modification of the state of all or some of the channels of a module.
The state of a forced output is fixed and can only be modified by the application after unforcing.
NOTE: However, in the event of a fault causing outputs to fallback, the statuses of these take the value defined on configuration of the Fallback mode parameter.
The different available commands are:
For one or more channels:
Forcing to 1,
Forcing to 0,
Unforcing (when the selected channel or channels have been forced).
For all the channels on the module (when at least one channel is forced):
Global unforcing of channels.
Procedure
The following table shows the procedure for forcing or unforcing all or some of the channels of a module:
Step
1
2
3
Action for one or more selected channels Action for all channels
Access the module's debug screen.
In the State column, right click on the cell of the required channel.
Select the desired function.
Force to 0,
Force to 1,
Unforce.
-
Click on the Global Unforce button in the module area.
35008167 12/2018
357
Debug of the Discrete TBX Modules
How to Access the SET and RESET Commands
At a Glance
These commands are used to modify the state of a module's outputs to 0 (RESET) or 1 (SET).
NOTE: The state of the output assigned by one of these commands is temporary and can be modified at any time by the application when the PLC is in RUN.
Procedure
The following table shows the procedure for assigning the value 0 or 1 to all or some of the channels of a module.
Step
1
2
3
Action for one channel
Access the module's debug screen.
In the State column, right click on the cell of the required channel.
Select the desired function.
Set,
Reset.
358
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Diagnostics of the Discrete TBX Modules
35008167 12/2018
Diagnostics of the Remote Input/Output Discrete TBX Modules Chapter 34
Diagnostics of the Remote Input/Output Discrete TBX Modules
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter describes the diagnostics function and commands for Discrete remote modules on a
Fipio bus.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
How to Access the Discrete Module Diagnostics Function
How to Access the Channel Diagnostics Function of a Discrete Module
Page
35008167 12/2018
359
Diagnostics of the Discrete TBX Modules
How to Access the Discrete Module Diagnostics Function
At a Glance
The Module diagnostics function displays current errors, where these exist, classed according to their category:
Internal faults:
Module failures,
Self-tests running,
External faults:
Terminal block fault,
Other faults:
Configuration fault,
Module missing or off,
Faulty channel(s)
.
A module fault is indicated when certain LEDs change to red, such as:
In the Fipio bus window:
The connection point number of the module on the Fipio bus is red.
In all screens at module level:
The I/O LED according to the type of fault,
The Channel LED in the Channel field.
A red LED on the Fault tab.
NOTE: If you disconnect a TBX extension module from the base module when this is configured, on power up the TBX base module will appear faulty on the Fipio bus and the I/O LED will turn red.
360
35008167 12/2018
Diagnostics of the Discrete TBX Modules
Procedure
The following table shows the procedure for accessing the Module fault screen.
Step
1
2
Action
Open the module on which you would like to perform diagnostics.
Click on the module reference in the channel zone and select the Fault tab.
Result: the list of module faults appears.
35008167 12/2018
Note: In the event of major failure, absence of the module, certain configuration faults, or a major configuration fault, access to the module diagnostics screen is not possible. The following message then appears on the screen: The module is not present or different from the one configured in this position .
361
Diagnostics of the Discrete TBX Modules
How to Access the Channel Diagnostics Function of a Discrete Module
At a Glance
The Channel diagnostics module displays current errors, where these exist, classed according to their category:
Internal faults:
Channel failure,
External faults:
Link or sensor supply fault,
Other faults:
Terminal block fault,
Configuration fault,
Communication fault.
A channel error appears in the Debug tab when the turns red.
LED, located in the Fault column,
Procedure
The following table shows the procedure for accessing the Channel fault screen.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the module's debug screen.
For the faulty channel, click on the button column.
Result: the list of channel faults appears.
situated in the Fault
362
Note: Channel diagnostics information can also be accessed by program
( READ_STS instruction).
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX Analog
35008167 12/2018
Software Installation of Remote Analog Input/Output Modules on the Fipio Bus Part III
Software Installation of Remote Analog Input/Output Modules on the Fipio Bus
Subject of this Part
This part presents the analog TBX modules, and describes their installation using Control Expert software.
What Is in This Part?
This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Chapter Name
General Introduction to the Analog Application -Specific Function Applied to
Remote TBX Modules
Remote TBX analog modules
Configuring the Analog Application
Presentation of Analog Application Language Objects
Debug of the Remote TBX Analog Modules
Calibration of the Remote TBX Analog Modules
Diagnostics of the Remote Analog TBX Modules
Page
35008167 12/2018
363
TBX Analog
364
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
General introduction
35008167 12/2018
General Introduction to the Analog Application -Specific Function Applied to Remote TBX Modules Chapter 35
General Introduction to the Analog Application -Specific
Function Applied to Remote TBX Modules
Overview
Introduction
The software installation of the application-specific modules is carried out from the various Control
Expert editors:
In offline mode,
In online mode.
The following order of installation phases is recommended but it is possible to change the order of certain phases (for example, starting with the configuration phase).
Installation Phases with Processor
The following table shows the various phases of installation with the processor.
Phase
Declaration of variables
Programming
Configuration
Association
Generation
Transfer
Adjustment /
Debugging
Documentation
Description
Declaration of IODDT-type variables for the applicationspecific modules and variables of the project.
Project programming.
Declaration of modules.
Module channel configuration.
Entry of configuration parameters.
Association of IODDTs with the channels configured
(variable editor).
Project generation (analysis and editing of links).
Transfer project to PLC.
Project debugging from debug screens, animation tables.
Modifying the program and adjustment parameters.
Building documentation file and printing miscellaneous information relating to the project.
Mode
Offline (1)
Offline (1)
Offline
Offline (1)
Offline
Online
Online
Online (1)
35008167 12/2018
365
General introduction
Phase Description
Operation/Diagnostic Displaying miscellaneous information necessary for supervisory control of the project.
Diagnostic of project and modules.
Key:
(1)
Mode
Online
These various phases can also be performed in the other mode.
366
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
TBX analog
35008167 12/2018
Remote TBX analog modules Chapter 36
Remote TBX analog modules
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter presents the remote TBX analog modules.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following sections:
Section
36.1
36.2
36.3
TBX AES 400 Module
TBX ASS 200 Module
TBX AMS 620 Module
Topic Page
35008167 12/2018
367
TBX analog
TBX AES 400 Module Section 36.1
TBX AES 400 Module
Subject of this section
This section introduces the TBX AES 400 remote module.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Introducing the TBX AES 400 module
Timing of measurements
Overflow Monitoring
Sensor Link Monitoring
Measurement Filtering
Displaying measurements
Sensor Alignment
Page
368
35008167 12/2018
TBX analog
Introducing the TBX AES 400 module
General
The TBX AES 400 base is an analog input module containing 4 insulated multiple range channels.
It must be connected to a TBX LEP 030 communicator.
This module supports the following ranges on each input:
High-level voltage,
High-level current,
Thermocouples (B, E ,J, K, N, R, S, T),
Thermowells (Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000).
Overview
TBX AES 400 input module connected to the TBX LEP 030 :
35008167 12/2018
369
TBX analog
Description
The TBX AES 400 module connected to the TBX LEP 030 communicator supports the following functions:
4
5
2
3
6
Address
1
7
Function
acquisition by relay multiplexing of the 4 channels with 50 Hz or 60 Hz rejection,
12 bit + sign analog digital conversion,
range selection for each input: voltage, current or thermocouple, input under/overshoot check,
sensor check, measurement filtering, linearization and cold junction compensation for thermocouples, linearization for thermowells, user-defined measurement formatting.
370
35008167 12/2018
TBX analog
Timing of measurements
Introduction
The cycle length (time) for the TBX AES 400 module depends on the electricity network frequency
(50Hz or 60Hz) and therefore on the rejection mode selected upon configuration.
The measurements are sequenced in the following manner: channel 0, channel 1, channel 2, channel 3 then acquisition of the module’s cold junction temperature.
Breakdown of the cycle time
Illustration of the cycle time
The table below shows the various terms of the calculation.
Type of time
Scanning time for a channel
Acquisition time for the cold junction temperature
Acquisition time for a complete cycle
50 Hz rejection
80 ms
80 ms
400 ms
60 Hz rejection
68 ms
68 ms
340 ms
NOTE:
The cycle is always identical, even when some channels are not in use,
The time required for the program to access the measurements also depends on the transmission times on the Fipio bus and on the PLC task period.
35008167 12/2018
371
TBX analog
Overflow Monitoring
Introduction
The TBX AES 400 module gives a choice of voltage ranges, current ranges, thermocouple ranges and thermoprobe ranges for each of its inputs.
For the selected range, the module performs an overflow check: it checks that the measurement is between a lower and upper limit.
The Measurement Area
The measurement area is located in the nominal area.
Above the nominal area, the overflow is tolerated up to the overflow limits.
Illustration:
Under/Overflow Identifiers
If the values provided by the application are outside the limits, the value of the overshot limit is saturated and the overshoot is indicated.
The module continues to provide the converted value until saturation of the converter or the display format (+32767/-32768), even if the validity of the measurement is not guaranteed.
The user can, via the overflow bit, avoid taking these measurements into account.
Overflow Bit:
Address
%I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR
Meaning
If equal to 1, this indicates a range overflow on the channel.
372
35008167 12/2018
TBX analog
Overflow Values of the Electrical Ranges
For voltage ranges, the module authorizes a 5% overflow for the positive electrical scope covered by the range.
Electrical ranges:
Range
+/-10 V
+/-5 V
0..20 mA
4..20 mA
-20..+20 mV
-50..+50 mV
-200..+200 mV
-500..+500 mV
Lower limit
-10.5 V
-5.25 V
-1 mA
+3.2 mA
-21 mV
-52.5 mV
-210 mV
-525 mV
Upper limit
+10.5 V
+5.25 V
+21 mA
+20.8 mA
+21 mV
+52.5 mV
+210 mV
+525 mV
Overflow Values of the Heat Ranges
Range overflow corresponds either to a dynamic overflow of the acquisition system, or to an overflow of the standard sensor measurement area, or to a dynamic overflow of the compensation temperature (-5°C to +85°C). The use of internal compensation in a standard environment (0°C to
+60°C) is compatible with the thresholds -5°C to +85°C.
Thermocouple ranges:
Range
Thermo B
Thermo E
Thermo J
Thermo K
Thermo N
Thermo R
Thermo S
Thermo T
Lower limit
0°C (32°F)
-270°C (-454°F)
-210°C (-346°F)
-270°C (-454°F)
-270°C (-454°F)
-50°C (-58°F)
-50°C (-58°F)
-270°C (-454°F)
Upper limit
+1802°C (+3276°F)
+717°C (+1322°F)
+935°C (+1715°F)
+1338°C (+2440°F)
+1300°C (+2372°F)
+1769°C (+3216°F)
+1769°C (+3216°F)
+400°C (+752°F)
Thermoprobe ranges:
Range
Pt100
Pt1000
Ni1000
Lower limit
-200°C (-328°F)
-200°C (-328°F)
-60°C (-76°F)
Upper limit
+850°C (+1562°F)
+850°C (+1562°F)
+250°C (+482°F)
35008167 12/2018
373
TBX analog
Sensor Link Monitoring
General
The module offers an option with which to check short-circuits and open circuits, for all ranges except the 0/20 mA range.
The result of the check is sent as a bit that can be used by the user program.
WARNING
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR
The sensor link check must be inhibited on unused channels in order to avoid any risk of disturbance on the other channels.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
374
35008167 12/2018
TBX analog
Measurement Filtering
Introduction
The system uses first order filtering. The filtering coefficient can be modified from a programming console or via the program.
Mathematical Formula
The mathematical formula used is as follows: where:
α = efficiency of the filter,
Mesf(n) = measurement filtered at moment n,
Mesf(n-1) = measurement filtered at moment n-1,
Valg(n) = gross value at moment n.
On configuration, you can select the filtering value from a choice of 7 values.
Values for the Module TBX AES 400
The filtering values are as follows, and depend on mains voltage:
Effectiveness Value
No filtering
Low filtering
Medium filtering 3
4
High filtering 5
6
0
1
2
Corresponding α Rejection time constant at 50 Hz
0
0.750
0.875
0
1.6 s
3.2 s
0.937
0.969
0.984
0.992
6.4 s
12.8 s
25.6 s
51.2 s
Rejection time constant at 60 Hz
0
1.4s
2.7s
5.4 s
10.8 s
21.1 s
43.5 s
35008167 12/2018
375
TBX analog
Displaying measurements
Introduction
This process is used to select the display format depending on which formats are provided in the user program.
It is necessary to differentiate between the electric ranges and the thermocouple or thermowell ranges.
Standardized display of electrical ranges
The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimals, also with symbol °/
Type of range unipolar range
0-10V, 0-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA bipolar range
+/-10V
Display from 0 to 10000 (0 °/ to 10000 °/ from -10000 to +10000 (-10.000 °/
)
to +10.000 °/ )
):
User-defined display of electrical ranges
The user can select the value range in which the measurements are expressed, by selecting:
the minimum limit corresponding to the range minimum: 0 (or - 10000 °/ ),
the maximum limit corresponding to the range maximum: + 10000 °/ .
The minimum and maximum limits are between -31128 and +31128.
Example:
Use of a 2/20 bar pressure sensor supplying a 0/20 mA signal and having a linear characteristic.
The user is interested in the pressure rather than the current value. The best resolution is obtained by selecting user display:
for minimum limit: 2000, for maximum limit: 20000.
The user-program then uses values expressed directly in the physical unit, the millibar.
376
35008167 12/2018
TBX analog
Illustration
Displaying thermocouple and thermowell ranges
With the temperature display format, values are provided in tenths of a degree.
With user display, the user can select standardized display 0..10000 by specifying the minimum and maximum temperatures corresponding to 0 and 10000.
The measurement provided to the application can be applied directly by the user, who can choose between standardized and temperature display formats.
Example:
Thermocouple J connected to a TBX AES 400 module. The user wishes to monitor a temperature range from 200 °C to 600 °C and obtain a result expressed as a percentage of the dynamic range.
In order to do this, select a standardized display format and define the limits: lower limit = 2000, upper limit = 6000.
The measurement accessible by program then falls between 0 and 10000.
For a temperature of 400°C, the module supplies a digital value equal to 5000 as the measurement, i.e. 50 % of the input dynamic range.
Illustration:
35008167 12/2018
377
TBX analog
Sensor Alignment
Introduction
Alignment consists of eliminating a systematic shift observed with a given sensor, around a given operating point. This is used to compensate for an error linked to the process. For this reason, module replacement does not require a new alignment, though sensor replacement or a change in this sensor’s operating point do require a new alignment.
Example
Let us suppose that a pressure sensor linked to a conditioner (1mV/mB) shows 3200 mB, when the actual pressure is 3210 mB.
The value measured by the module on a standardized scale will be 3200 (3.20 V). You can align your measurement to the value 3210 (required value).
After this alignment procedure, the measurement channel will apply a systematic offset of +10. The alignment value to enter is 3210.
Alignment Values
The alignment value can be modified from the Control Expert screen, even if the program is in
RUN.
For each input channel, the user can:
Display and modify the required measurement value,
Save the alignment value,
See whether the channel already has an alignment.
The alignment offset can also be modified for each program.
The alignment is performed for each channel operating normally, with no influence on the operating modes of the module channel. The maximum variation between the measured value and the required value (aligned value) must not exceed 1000.
The alignment offset is stored in the word %MW\2.e\0.m.c.8.
378
35008167 12/2018
TBX analog
TBX ASS 200 Module Section 36.2
TBX ASS 200 Module
Subject of this section
This section introduces the TBX ASS 200 rack-based module.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Introducing the TBX ASS 200 module
Output characteristics for the TBX ASS 200 module
Fault handling
Overflow Monitoring for Module TBX ASS 200
Page
35008167 12/2018
379
TBX analog
Introducing the TBX ASS 200 module
General
The TBX ASS 200 base unit is an analog output module containing 2 insulated channels. It must be associated with a TBX LEP 030 communicator. This module offers the following ranges for each of its outputs:
Voltage: 10V,
Current: 0/20 mA and 4/20 mA.
Overview
The TBX ASS 200 module associated with the TBX LEP 030 communicator supports the following functions:
refreshing the digital values corresponding to the analog output values transmitted by the PLC, processing dialog errors with the PLC,
range selection for each output: voltage, current, digital analog conversion.
Overview of the TBX ASS 200 module associated with the TBX LEP 030 communicator:
380
35008167 12/2018
TBX analog
Description
The TBX ASS 200 module associated with the TBX LEP 030 communicator supports the following functions:
2
3
Address
1
4
Function refreshing the digital values transmitted by the processor, processing PLC dialog faults, range selection for each output: voltage, current, digital analog conversion.
NOTE: One channel can only be used in a single range, i.e. current or voltage.
35008167 12/2018
381
TBX analog
Output characteristics for the TBX ASS 200 module
Writing outputs
The user can access two words via the program (1 word of 16 bits per channel), where the analog output values are given.
from 0 to 10000 (or 0 °/ à 10000 °/ from -10000 to +10000 (-10.000 °/
) for unipolar ranges 0/20 mA and 4/20 mA,
to +10.000 °/ ) for bipolar range +/-10 V.
Refreshing the outputs via the module
The outputs are refreshed every 5 ms
The response time between the output write via the program and updating the output at the module terminals depends on the period of the PLC task where the module is configured.
382
35008167 12/2018
TBX analog
Fault handling
Dialog faults with the PLC
This type of handling groups together:
setting the PLC to STOP mode (or the task in which the module is configured), a PLC fault, a link fault between the PLC and the module.
In the above cases, the user has two options for each output:
maintain the output at the current value, fallback to a defined value. The value must be selected between the normal display limits
(0/10000) for unipolar ranges or –10000/10000 for the voltage range. By default, the module is configured in fallback to 0 mode.
Internal errors in the module
When the module has an internal error the outputs are forced to 0.
35008167 12/2018
383
TBX analog
Overflow Monitoring for Module TBX ASS 200
Introduction
Module TSX ASS 200 includes an overflow monitoring device.
Range Specifications
The limits and accuracies of the different ranges are as follows:
Range
+/- 10V
0.20mA
4.20mA
Lower limit
-10000
0
0
Upper limit
+10000
+10000
+10000
Accuracy
Conversion over 11 bits + sign from -2048 to +2047 points
Conversion over 11 bits from 0 to
+2047 points
Conversion over 11 bits from 0 to
+2047 points
Illustration
384
35008167 12/2018
TBX analog
Under/Overflow Identifiers
If the values provided by the application are outside the limits, the value of the overshot limit is saturated. The overflow is indicated by:
Bit name
%I\b.e\r.m.c.ERR
Meaning
If equal to 1, this indicates a range overflow on the channel.
35008167 12/2018
385
TBX analog
TBX AMS 620 Module Section 36.3
TBX AMS 620 Module
Subject of this section
This section introduces the TBX AMS 620 remote module.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Introducing the TBX AMS 620 module
Timing of measurements on inputs
Under/Overshoot Monitoring on Inputs
Filtering Measurements on Inputs
Displaying measurements on inputs
Characteristics of the outputs
Fault handling
Output Overflow Monitoring for Module TBX AMS 620
Sensor Alignment
Page
386
35008167 12/2018
TBX analog
Introducing the TBX AMS 620 module
General
The TBX AMS 620 base unit is an analog output module containing 6 high-level non-insulated channels and 2 insulated outputs. It must be associated to a TBX LEP 030 communicator.
This module supports the following ranges on each input :
High-level voltage,
High-level current.
This module supports the following ranges on each output :
High-level voltage,
High-level current.
35008167 12/2018
387
TBX analog
Overview
Overview of the TBX AMS 620 module associated to the TBX LEP 030 communicator:
388
35008167 12/2018
TBX analog
Description
The TBX AMS 620 module associated with the TBX LEP 030 communicator supports the following input functions :
4
5
6
2
3
Address
1
Function
acquisition of the 6 channels using multiplexing,
12 bit + sign analog digital conversion, range selection for each input: voltage, current, thermocouple,
input under/overshoot monitoring, measurement filtering, user-defined measurement formatting.
The TBX AMS 620 module associated with the TBX LEP 030 communicator supports the following output functions:
8
9
Address
7
10
Function refreshing the digital values transmitted by the processor, processing PLC dialog faults, range selection for each output: voltage, current, digital analog conversion.
35008167 12/2018
389
TBX analog
Timing of measurements on inputs
Introduction
The cycle time for the TBX AMS 620 module is fixed at 42.4 ms.
The measurements are sequenced in the following manner: channel 0, channel 1, channel 2, channel 3, channel 4, channel 5 then acquisition of two internal reference voltage channels, required for cyclical calibration.
Breakdown of the cycle time
Scanning time values:
Type of time
Scanning time for a channel
Acquisition time for a complete cycle
Illustration:
Time
5.3 ms,
42.4 ms.
NOTE:
The cycle is always identical, even when some channels are not in use,
The time required for the program to access the measurements also depends on the transmission times on the Fipio bus and on the PLC task period.
390
35008167 12/2018
TBX analog
Under/Overshoot Monitoring on Inputs
Introduction
The TBX AMS 620 module provides a choice between voltage and current ranges.
For the selected range, the module performs an overflow check: it checks that the measurement is between a lower and upper limit.
Measurement Areas
The measurement area is located in the nominal area.
Above the nominal area, the overflow is tolerated up to the overflow limits.
Illustration:
Under/Overflow Identifiers
If the values provided by the application are outside the limits, the value of the overshot limit is saturated.
The module continues to provide the converted value until saturation of the converter or the display format (+32767/-32768), even though the validity of the measurement is not guaranteed.
The user can, via the overflow bit, avoid taking these measurements into account.
Overflow bit:
Bit name
%I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR
Meaning
If equal to 1, this indicates a range overflow on the channel.
35008167 12/2018
391
TBX analog
Overflow Values of the Electrical Ranges
For voltage ranges, the module authorizes a 5% overflow for the positive electrical scope covered by the range.
Overflow values according to input type
Range
+/-10 V
0..5 V
0..20 mA
4..20 mA
Lower limit
-10.5 V
0 V: this overflow is not detected
0 V: this overflow is not detected
+3.2 mA
Upper limit
+10.5 V
+5.25 V
+21 mA
+20.8 mA
392
35008167 12/2018
TBX analog
Filtering Measurements on Inputs
Introduction
The system uses first order filtering. The filtering coefficient can be modified from a programming console or via the program.
Mathematical Formula
The mathematical formula used is as follows: where:
α = efficiency of the filter,
Mesf(n) = measurement filtered at moment n,
Mesf(n-1) = measurement filtered at moment n-1,
Valg(n) = gross value at moment n.
On configuration, you can select the filtering value from a choice of 7 values.
Values for the Module TSX AMS 620
The filter values are as follows:
Effectiveness
No filtering
Low filtering
Medium filtering 3
4
High filtering
1
2
5
6
Value to be selected Time constant
0 0 s
170 ms
339 ms
678 ms
1.35 s
2.71 s
5.42 s
Corresponding α
0
0.750
0.875
0.937
0.969
0.984
0.992
35008167 12/2018
393
TBX analog
Displaying measurements on inputs
Introduction
This process is used to select the display format depending on which formats are provided in the user program.
Standardized display of electrical ranges
The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimals, also with symbol °/
Type of range unipolar range
0-10V, 0-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA bipolar range
+/-10V
Display from 0 to 10000 (0 °/ to 10000 °/ from -10000 to +10000 (-10.000 °/
).
to +10.000 °/ ).
):
User-defined display of electrical ranges
The user can select the value range in which the measurements are expressed, by selecting:
the minimum limit corresponding to the range minimum: 0 (or - 10000 °/ the maximum limit corresponding to the range maximum: + 10000 °/
The minimum and maximum limits are between -31128 and +31128.
.
),
Example:
Use of a 2/20 bar pressure sensor supplying a 0/20 mA signal and having a linear characteristic.
The user is interested in the pressure rather than the current value. The best resolution is obtained by selecting user display:
for minimum limit: 2000, for maximum limit: 20000.
The user-program then uses values expressed directly in the physical unit, the millibar.
Illustration:
394
35008167 12/2018
TBX analog
Characteristics of the outputs
Output writing
The user has access via the program to 2 words (1 16-bit word per channel) in which the values of the analog outputs are given.
from 0 to 10000 (that is 0 °/ to 10000 °/ from -10000 to +10000 (-10000 °/
) for unipolar ranges 0/20 mA and 4/20 mA,
to +10000 °/ ) for bipolar range +/-10 V.
Refreshing outputs via the module
Outputs are refreshed every 5 ms
The response time between writing the output via the program and updating the outputs to the module limits depends on the PLC task period in which the module is configured.
35008167 12/2018
395
TBX analog
Fault handling
Dialog faults with the PLC
This type of handling groups together:
setting the PLC to STOP mode (or the task in which the module is configured), a PLC fault, a link fault between the PLC and the module.
In the above cases, the user has two options for each output:
maintain the output at the current value, fallback to a defined value. The value must be selected between the normal display limits
(0/10000) for unipolar ranges or –10000/10000 for the voltage range. By default, the module is configured in fallback to 0 mode.
Internal errors in the module
When the module has an internal error the outputs are forced to 0.
396
35008167 12/2018
Output Overflow Monitoring for Module TBX AMS 620
Introduction
Module TBX AMS 620 includes an overflow monitoring device.
Range Specifications
The limits and accuracies of the different ranges are as follows:
Range
+/- 10V
0.20mA
4.20mA
Lower limit
-10000
0
0
Upper limit
+10000
+10000
+10000
Accuracy
Conversion over 11 bits + sign from
-2048 to +2047 points
Conversion over 11 bits from 0 to
+2047 points
Conversion over 11 bits from 0 to
+2047 points
Illustration
TBX analog
35008167 12/2018
397
TBX analog
Under/Overflow Identifiers
If the values provided by the application are outside the limits, the value of the overshot limit is saturated. The overflow is indicated by:
Bit name
%I\b.e\r.m.c.ERR
Meaning
If equal to 1, this indicates a range overflow on the channel.
398
35008167 12/2018
TBX analog
Sensor Alignment
Introduction
Alignment consists of eliminating a systematic shift observed with a given sensor, around a given operating point. This is used to compensate for an error linked to the process. For this reason, module replacement does not require a new alignment, though sensor replacement or a change in this sensor’s operating point do require a new alignment.
Example
Let us suppose that a pressure sensor linked to a conditioner (1mV/mB) shows 3200 mB, when the actual pressure is 3210 mB.
The value measured by the module on a standardized scale will be 3200 (3.20 V). You can align your measurement to the value 3210 (required value).
After this alignment procedure, the measurement channel will apply a systematic offset of +10.
The alignment value to enter is 3210.
Alignment Values
The alignment value can be modified from the Control Expert screen, even if the program is in
RUN.
For each input channel, you can:
Display and modify the required measurement value,
Save the alignment value,
See whether the channel already has an alignment.
The alignment offset can also be modified for each program.
The alignment is performed for each channel operating normally, with no influence on the operating modes of the module channel. The maximum variation between the measured value and the required value (aligned value) must not exceed 1000.
The alignment offset is stored in the word %MW\2.e\0.m.c.8.
35008167 12/2018
399
TBX analog
400
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Configuring the Analog Application
35008167 12/2018
Configuring the Analog Application Chapter 37
Configuring the Analog Application
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter describes the Configuration aspect of the installation of the analog application applied to remote TBX modules.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following sections:
Section
37.1
37.2
37.3
Topic
Configuring a Remote TBX Analog Module: General
Analog Input/Output Channel Parameters
Configuration of Analog Parameters
Page
35008167 12/2018
401
Configuring the Analog Application
Configuring a Remote TBX Analog Module: General Section 37.1
Configuring a Remote TBX Analog Module: General
Description of the Configuration Screen of an Analog TBX Module
At a Glance
The module configuration screen, selected on the Fipio bus, displays the parameters associated with the Analog input or output channels
Illustration
The figure below represents a configuration screen.
402
35008167 12/2018
Configuring the Analog Application
Description
The following table shows the various elements of the configuration screen and their functions.
2
3
Number Element
1 Tabs
4
5
Module area
Channel area
General parameters area
Configuration area
Function
The tab in the foreground indicates the mode in progress
(Configuration in this example). Every mode can be selected using the respective tab. The available modes are:
Configuration,
Debug which can be accessed only in online mode,
Calibration which can be accessed only in online mode.
Gives a reminder of the device’s shortened name.
Is used:
By clicking on the reference number, to display the tabs:
Description which gives the characteristics of the device.
I/O Objects (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Operating Modes) which is used to presymbolize the input/output objects,
Fault, which shows the device faults (in online mode only).
By clicking on the Channel, to select the channel or group of channels (maximum 4) to configure.
To the right of the Channel is the Symbol. This is the name of the channel defined by the user (using the variable editor).
This area is used to define the task (MAST or FAST) in which the channel implicit exchange objects will be exchanged.
This area is used to configure the devices.
35008167 12/2018
403
Configuring the Analog Application
Analog Input/Output Channel Parameters Section 37.2
Analog Input/Output Channel Parameters
Subject of this Section
This section presents the different input/output channel parameters of the remote TBX analog modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Input Parameters for Remote Analog TBX Modules
Output Parameters for Remote TBX Analog Modules
Page
404
35008167 12/2018
Configuring the Analog Application
Input Parameters for Remote Analog TBX Modules
At a Glance
Remote analog input TBX modules have parameters for each channel displayed in the module configuration screen.
Parameters
Parameters for each of the modules (the default parameters are in bold in the tables).
Parameter
Number of input channels
Range
TBX AES 400
4
Filtering
High level display
TBX AMS 620
6
+/-10 V
+/-5 V
0..20 mA
4..20 mA
Pt100 / Pt1000 / Ni1000
Thermo B / Thermo E / Thermo J
/Thermo K / Thermo L / Thermo N /
Thermo R / Thermo S / Thermo T
+/-20 mV, +/-50 mV
+/-200 mV, +/-500 mV
0..6
+/-10 V
0..5 V
0..20 mA
4..20 mA
0..6
Display
Thermoprobes
Thermocouples
User
1/10°C
1/10°F
-
User
Task associated with the channel
Rejection
MAST
FAST
50Hz / 60Hz -
MAST
FAST
35008167 12/2018
405
Configuring the Analog Application
Output Parameters for Remote TBX Analog Modules
At a Glance
Remote analog output modules have parameters for each channel displayed in the module configuration screen.
Parameters
Parameters for each of the modules (the default parameters are in bold in the tables).
Module TBX AMS 620
Number of output channels 2
Range +/-10 V
0..20 mA
4..20 mA
Display
TBX ASS 200
2
+/-10 V
0..20 mA
4..20 mA
Task associated with the channel
Fallback
Mast / Fast
Fallback or Maintain
Fallback value
Mast / Fast
Fallback or Maintain
Fallback value
406
35008167 12/2018
Configuring the Analog Application
Configuration of Analog Parameters Section 37.3
Configuration of Analog Parameters
Subject of this Section
This section describes the implementation of the different configuration parameters for remote TBX analog modules.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Modification of the Range for an Input or Output of an Analog Module
Modification of the Task Associated with an Analog Module Channel
Modification of the Display Format for a Voltage or Current Channel
Modification of the Display Format for a Thermocouple or Thermoprobe Channel
Modification of the Filtering Value for Analog Module Channels
Modification of the Fallback Mode for Analog Outputs
Page
35008167 12/2018
407
Configuring the Analog Application
Modification of the Range for an Input or Output of an Analog Module
At a Glance
This parameter defines the range of the input or output channel.
Depending on the module type, the input can be:
In electrical voltage,
In electrical intensity,
Thermocouple,
Thermoprobe.
Depending on the module type, the output can be:
In electrical voltage,
In electrical intensity.
Procedure
The table below shows the procedure for defining the range assigned to the channels of an analog module.
Step
1
2
Procedure
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
For the required channel, click the drop-down menu button in the Range column.
Result: a drop-down list appears.
3
4
Select the required range.
Confirm the configuration.
408
35008167 12/2018
Configuring the Analog Application
Modification of the Task Associated with an Analog Module Channel
At a Glance
This parameter defines the task in which inputs are acquired and outputs are updated.
The task is defined:
For all the channels of a Fipio connection point,
For a group of 2 or 4 consecutive channels.
The possible choices are as follows:
The MAST task,
The FAST task.
Note: It is essential not to assign to the FAST task more than 2 analog modules, each with 4 channels in use. Any more may lead to system problems.
NOTE: The FAST task is assigned to the input channels only in fast service routine.
Procedure
The table below shows the procedure for defining the type of task assigned to the channels of an analog module.
Step
1
2
3
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
Select, in the Channel area, the group of channels to configure.
In the General parameters area, click on the drop-down menu button in the Task field.
Result: a drop-down list appears:
4
5
Select the required task.
Confirm the configuration.
35008167 12/2018
409
Configuring the Analog Application
Modification of the Display Format for a Voltage or Current Channel
At a Glance
This parameter defines the measurement display format for an analog module channel, for which the range is configured in voltage or current.
The display format can be:
Standardized, in which the scale is by default 0..10000 or +10000 (%),
User-defined, in which the default scale can be modified by the user.
Procedure
The table below shows the procedure for defining the scale assigned to an analog module channel.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
Click in the cell of the Scale column of the channel to set.
Result: the Channel Parameters dialog box appears:
3
4
5
Enter the values to assign to the channel into one of the two Display boxes in the Scale area.
Validate the choice by closing the dialog box.
Note: if the default values have been selected (standardized display), the corresponding cell in the Scale area shows %. Otherwise it will show User
(user display).
Validate the modification by clicking Edit → Confirm.
410
35008167 12/2018
Configuring the Analog Application
Modification of the Display Format for a Thermocouple or Thermoprobe Channel
At a Glance
This parameter defines the measurement display format for an analog module channel, for which the range is configured in thermocouple or thermoprobe.
The display format can be for a display in degrees Celsius or in degrees Fahrenheit, with possible short-circuit or open circuit display.
The display format can be:
Standardized, in which the scale is by default for the selected thermocouple or thermoprobe, defined in tenths of a degree (for example: -600 to +1100 C for a Ni1000 probe) (1/10 F or
1/10 C),
User-defined, in which the default scale can be modified by the user.
Procedure
The table below shows the procedure for defining the scale assigned to an analog module channel.
Step
1
2
3
Action
Access the configuration screen of the required module.
Click in the cell of the Scale column of the channel to set.
Result: an arrow appears.
Click on the arrow in the cell of the Scale column of the channel to set.
Result : the Channel Parameters dialog box appears.
35008167 12/2018
8
6
7
4
5
Check the Broken Wire Test box is you want to activate this function.
Select the temperature unit by checking °C or °F.
Check the Standardized box for a standardized display.
Validate the choice by closing the dialog box.
Caution: if the default values have been selected (Standardized display), the corresponding cell in the Scale column shows %.. regardless of selected temperature unit. Otherwise it will show User (user display).
Validate the modification by clicking Edit → Confirm.
411
Configuring the Analog Application
Modification of the Filtering Value for Analog Module Channels
At a Glance
This parameter defines the type of filtering for the selected input channel of analog modules.
The available filtering values are:
0: no filtering,
1 and 2: low filtering,
3 and 4: medium filtering,
5 and 6: high filtering.
NOTE: If the fast scan cycle is selected, filtering is not taken into account.
Procedure
The following table shows the procedure for defining the filtering value assigned to the analog module inputs.
Step
1
2
3
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
Click, for each input channel required, on the arrow of the drop-down menu in the Filter column.
Result: The drop-down menu appears:
4
5
Select the filtering value to assign to the selected channel.
Validate the modification by clicking Edit → Confirm.
412
35008167 12/2018
Configuring the Analog Application
Modification of the Fallback Mode for Analog Outputs
At a Glance
This parameter sets the fallback mode which outputs take on when the PLC switches to STOP or if there is a communication fault.
The possible modes are as follows:
Fallback: outputs are set to a value that can be set between -10000 and 10000 (0 by default),
Maintain: the outputs remain in the state in which they were before the change to STOP.
WARNING
UNEXPECTED APPLICATION BEHAVIOR
Ensure that the extension module is connected to the base module via the connection cable, else the extension module outputs would not switch to fallback mode.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Procedure
The following table shows the procedure for defining the fallback mode assigned to the outputs of the analog modules.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Action
Access the configuration screen of the required module.
Check the box in the cell of the Fallback mode column of the channel to configure.
Enter, in the cell corresponding to the Fallback value column, the required value.
Result: the selected fallback mode will therefore be assigned to the selected channel.
For a Maintain, uncheck the box in the cell of the Fallback mode column of the channel to configure.
Result: the value maintain will be assigned to the selected channel.
Validate the modification by clicking Edit → Confirm.
35008167 12/2018
413
Configuring the Analog Application
414
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Language Objects
35008167 12/2018
Presentation of Analog Application Language Objects Chapter 38
Presentation of Analog Application Language Objects
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter describes the language objects associated with the analog application using different
IODDTs.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following sections:
Section
38.1
38.2
Topic
Remote TBX Analog Module Language Objects and IODDTs
Analog Module IODDTs
Page
35008167 12/2018
415
Language Objects
Remote TBX Analog Module Language Objects and IODDTs Section 38.1
Remote TBX Analog Module Language Objects and IODDTs
Presentation of Language Objects of the Analog Application Function Associated with
Remote Modules
General
Analog modules have different associated IODDTs.
The IODDTs are predefined by the manufacturer. They contain input/output language objects belonging to a channel of an application-specific module.
NOTE: IODDT variables can be created in two different ways:
Using the I/O objects
Using the Data Editor
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Operating Modes)
(see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Operating Modes)
tab,
.
There are four types of IODDT for the analog application:
T_ANA_IN_GEN ,
T_ANA_IN_STD ,
T_ANA_OUT_GEN ,
T_ANA_OUT_STD .
Language Object Types
Each IODDT contains a group of language objects which are used to control them and check their operation.
There are two types of language object:
Implicit exchange objects, which are automatically exchanged on each cycle of the task associated with the module
explicit exchange instructions
Explicit exchange objects, which are exchanged when requested to do so by the project, using
,
Implicit exchanges concern the module inputs/outputs: process value results, information and commands.
Explicit exchanges are used to set up the module's parameters and for module diagnostics
Creating an IODDT-Type Data Instance
In the software installation principle, you must create an IODDT-type instance, associate the
IODDT instance with the module and generate the project (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Operating Modes) .
416
35008167 12/2018
Language Objects
Analog Module IODDTs Section 38.2
Analog Module IODDTs
Subject of this Section
This section presents the different IODDTs and language objects associated with the remote analog TBX modules.
NOTE: The T_GEN_MOD -type IODDT is associated with all Premium PLC modules (see Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Fipio Bus, Setup Manual) .
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic
Detail of the Language Objects of the IODDT of the T_ANA_IN_GEN Type
Details of T_ANA_IN_STD-Type IODDT Implicit Exchange Objects
Details of T_ANA_IN_STD-Type IODDT Explicit Exchange Objects
Detail of the Language Objects of the IODDT of the T_ANA_OUT_GEN Type
Details of T_ANA_OUT_STD-Type IODDT Implicit Exchange Objects
Details of T_ANA_OUT_STD-Type IODDT Explicit Exchange Objects
Page
35008167 12/2018
417
Language Objects
Detail of the Language Objects of the IODDT of the T_ANA_IN_GEN Type
At a Glance
The tables below present the implicit exchange objects for the T_ANA_IN_GEN -type IODDT that are applicable to all analog input modules.
Input Value
The following table shows the analog value.
Standard symbol
VALUE
Type
INT
Access
R
Meaning
Analog input value.
Address
%IW\2.e\0.m.c.0
Error bit %I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR
The table below presents the error bit %I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR..
Standard symbol
CH_ERROR
Type
BOOL
Access
R
Meaning
Analog channel error bit.
Address
%I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR
418
35008167 12/2018
Language Objects
Details of T_ANA_IN_STD-Type IODDT Implicit Exchange Objects
At a Glance
The tables below present the implicit exchange objects for the T_ANA_IN_STD -type IODDT that are applicable to all analog input modules.
Input Value
The following table shows the analog value.
Standard symbol
VALUE
Type
INT
Access Meaning
R Analog input value
Address
%IW\2.e\0.m.c.0
Error bit %I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR
The table below presents the error bit %I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR..
Standard symbol
CH_ERROR
Type
BOOL
Access Meaning
R Analog channel error bit
Address
%I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR
35008167 12/2018
419
Language Objects
Details of T_ANA_IN_STD-Type IODDT Explicit Exchange Objects
At a Glance
This section presents the explicit exchange objects for the T_ANA_IN_STD -type IODDT applicable to all Analog input modules. It includes the word type objects whose bits have a specific meaning.
These objects are described in detail below.
Example of declaration of a variable: IODDT_VAR1 of the T_ANA_IN_STD type.
Observations
In general, the meaning of the bits is given for bit status 1. In specific cases an explanation is given for each status of the bit.
Not all bits are used.
Execution Indicators of an Explicit Exchange: EXCH_STS
The table below presents the meanings of the exchange control bits of the channel EXCH_STS
(%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0).
Standard symbol
STS_IN_PROGR
CMD_IN_PROGR
ADJ_IN_PROGR
Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Access Meaning
R Reading of channel status words in progress.
Address
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0.0
R
R
Current command parameters exchange in progress.
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0.1
Adjustment parameters exchange in progress. %MW\2.e\0.m.c.0.2
Explicit Exchange Report: EXCH_RPT
The table below presents the meaning of the exchange report bits EXCH_RPT (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1).
Standard symbol
STS_ERR
CMD_ERR
ADJ_ERR
RECONF_ERR
Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
R
R
Access Meaning
R Reading error for channel status words.
R Error during a command parameter exchange
(1 = failure).
Address
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.0
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.1
Error during adjustment parameters exchange. %MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.2
Fault when reconfiguring the channel (1 = failure).
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.15
420
35008167 12/2018
Language Objects
Standard Channel Faults, CH_FLT
The table below shows the meaning of the bits of the status word CH_FLT (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2).
Reading is performed by a READ_STS ( IODDT_VAR1 ).
Standard symbol
SENSOR_FLT
RANGE_FLT
BLK
EXT_PS_FLT
INTERNAL_FLT
CONF_FLT
COM_FLT
APPLI_FLT
Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
NOT_READY BOOL
COLD_JUNCTION_FLT BOOL
CALIB_FLT
RANGE_UNF
RANGE_OVF
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Access Meaning
R Sensor link fault.
Range overshoot fault.
Terminal block fault.
External supply fault.
Channel failure.
Address
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.0
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.1
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.2
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.3
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.4
Different hardware and software configurations. %MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.5
Communication fault with PLC.
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.6
Application fault (adjustment or configuration error).
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.7
Channel not ready.
Cold junction compensation fault.
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.8
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.9
Calibration fault.
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.10
Recalibrated channel or lower range overshoot. %MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.14
Aligned channel or upper range overshoot.
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.15
Parameters
The table below shows the meaning of the words (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.7 and %MW\2.e\0.m.c.8). The requests used are those associated with the parameters ( READ_PARAM and WRITE_PARAM ).
Standard symbol
FILTER_COEFF
ALIGNMENT_OFFSET
Type
INT
INT
Access Meaning
R/W Value of filter coefficient.
R/W Alignment offset value.
Address
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.7
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.8
35008167 12/2018
421
Language Objects
Detail of the Language Objects of the IODDT of the T_ANA_OUT_GEN Type
At a Glance
The tables below present the implicit exchange objects for the T_ANA_OUT_GEN -type IODDT that are applicable to all analog output modules.
Value of the output
The following table shows the analog output.
Standard symbol
VALUE
Type
INT
Access Meaning
R Value of the analog output.
Address
%QW\2.e\0.m.c.0
Error Bit % Ir.m.c.ERR
The table below presents the error bit %I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR..
Standard symbol
CH_ERROR
Type
BOOL
Access Meaning
R Analog channel error bit.
Address
%I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR
422
35008167 12/2018
Language Objects
Details of T_ANA_OUT_STD-Type IODDT Implicit Exchange Objects
At a Glance
The tables below present the implicit exchange objects for the T_ANA_OUT_STD -type IODDT that are applicable to all analog output modules.
Value of The Output
The following table shows the analog output.
Standard symbol
VALUE
Type
INT
Access Meaning
R Measurement of the analog output.
Address
%QW\2.e\0.m.c.0
Error bit %I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR
The table below presents the error bit %I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR..
Standard symbol
CH_ERROR
Type
BOOL
Access Meaning
R Analog channel error bit.
Address
%I\2.e\0.m.c.ERR
35008167 12/2018
423
Language Objects
Details of T_ANA_OUT_STD-Type IODDT Explicit Exchange Objects
At a Glance
This section presents the explicit exchange objects for the T_ANA_OUT_STD -type IODDT applicable to all Analog output modules. It includes the word type objects whose bits have a specific meaning. These objects are described in detail below.
Example of a declaration of a variable: IODDT_VAR1 of the T_ANA_OUT_STD type.
Observations
In general, the meaning of the bits is given for bit status 1. In specific cases an explanation is given for each status of the bit.
Not all bits are used.
Execution Indicators of an Explicit Exchange: EXCH_STS
The table below presents the meanings of the exchange control bits of the channel EXCH_STS
(%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0).
Standard symbol
STS_IN_PROGR
CMD_IN_PROGR
ADJ_IN_PROGR
Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Access Meaning
R Reading of channel status words in progress.
Address
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0.0
R
R
Current command parameters exchange in progress.
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.0.1
Adjustment parameters exchange in progress. %MW\2.e\0.m.c.0.2
Explicit Exchange Report: EXCH_RPT
The table below presents the meaning of the exchange report bits EXCH_RPT (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1).
Standard symbol
STS_ERR
CMD_ERR
ADJ_ERR
RECONF_ERR
Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
R
R
Access Meaning
R Reading error for channel status words.
R Error during a command parameter exchange
(1 = failure).
Address
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.0
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.1
Error during adjustment parameters exchange. %MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.2
Fault when reconfiguring the channel (1 = failure).
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.1.15
424
35008167 12/2018
Language Objects
Standard Channel Faults, CH_FLT
The following table shows the meaning of the bits of the status word CH_FLT (%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2).
Reading is performed by a READ_STS ( IODDT_VAR1 ).
Standard symbol
PS_FLT
RANGE_FLT
BLK
RANGE_OVERRUN
INTERNAL_FLT
CONF_FLT
COM_FLT
APPLI_FLT
NOT_READY
Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
R
R
R
R
R
Access Meaning
R 24 V supply fault.
R
Range overshoot fault.
Terminal block fault.
Range overshoot fault by higher value if the
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.1 bit is set to 1.
R
R
Channel failure.
Address
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.0
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.1
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.2
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.3
Different hardware and software configurations. %MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.5
Communication fault with PLC.
Application fault (adjustment or configuration error).
Channel not ready.
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.4
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.6
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.7
%MW\2.e\0.m.c.2.8
35008167 12/2018
425
Language Objects
426
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Debug of the TBX Analog Modules
35008167 12/2018
Debug of the Remote TBX Analog Modules Chapter 39
Debug of the Remote TBX Analog Modules
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter describes the debug function and commands for remote Analog modules on a Fipio bus.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Presentation of the Debug Function for a Remote Analog Module
Description of the Debug screen of an Analog TBX Module
Modification of the Channel Filtering Value
Input Channel Alignment
Page
35008167 12/2018
427
Debug of the TBX Analog Modules
Presentation of the Debug Function for a Remote Analog Module
Introduction
The Debug function is used for each TBX Analog input/output module present in the application:
To display the parameters of each of the channels (channel state, filtering vale, etc.),
To access the diagnostics and calibration of the selected channel.
The function also provides access to module diagnostics in the event of a fault.
NOTE: This function is only available in online mode.
NOTE: Access to the Debug function is limited to four Fipio device screens (TBX Discrete, TBX
Analog, IP67, etc.) opened simultaneously.
428
35008167 12/2018
Debug of the TBX Analog Modules
Description of the Debug screen of an Analog TBX Module
At a Glance
The debug screen displays the value and state of each of the selected module's channels in real time.
Illustration
The figure below represents a debug screen.
35008167 12/2018
429
Debug of the TBX Analog Modules
Description
The following table shows the different elements of the debug screen and their functions.
Number Element
1 Tabs
2
3
4
5
Module area
Channel area
General parameters area
Parameters in progress area
Function
The tab in the foreground indicates the mode in progress (Debug in this example). Each mode can be selected using the respective tab.
Debug which can be accessed only in online mode,
Calibration which can be accessed only in online mode,
Configuration.
Specifies the abbreviated heading of the module.
In the same area there are 3 LEDs which indicate the module’s operating mode:
RUN indicates the operating status of the module,
ERR indicates an internal fault in the module,
I/O indicates a fault from outside the module or an application fault.
Is used:
By clicking on the reference number, to display the tabs:
Description which gives the characteristics of the device.
I/O Objects (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Operating
Modes) which is used to presymbolize the input/output objects.
Fault which shows the device faults (in online mode).
By clicking on the Channel, to select the channel or group of channels (maximum 4) to debug. To the left of the symbol there is a copy of the CHx channel LED.
Gives a reminder of the channel setting:
Task: specifies the MAST or FAST task configured. This heading is frozen.
This area displays the state of the inputs and outputs, and the different parameters in progress.
For each of the channels, there is a maximum of six columns:
The Symbol column displays the symbol associated with the channel
when it has been defined by the user (using the variable editor),
The Fault column creates direct access to the diagnostics for each channel when these are faulty (indicated by the indicator lamp built into the diagnostics access button, which turns red),
The Value column displays the status of each of the channels of the module,
The Filter column indicates the filtering value,
The Align column indicates the alignment value,
The Fallback Value column indicates the fallback value.
430
35008167 12/2018
Debug of the TBX Analog Modules
Modification of the Channel Filtering Value
At a Glance
This function is used to modify the filtering value for one or more channels of an analog module.
The available commands are:
0: no filtering,
1 and 2: low filtering,
3 and 4: medium filtering,
5 and 6: high filtering.
Procedure
The table below shows the procedure for changing a Filtering value.
Step
1
2
Action for one channel
Access the Debug screen.
Select the channel to modify in the Parameters in progress area and double-click on the corresponding box in the Filter column.
Result: the Adjust Channel dialog box appears.
35008167 12/2018
3
4
5
Click on the small arrow in the Filter field of the Adjust Channel dialog box, and define in the drop-down menu the new selected value.
Confirm the selection by clicking Validate and closing the Adjust Channel dialog box.
The new filtering value then appears in the box corresponding to the selected channel, in the Filter column of the Parameters in progress area.
431
Debug of the TBX Analog Modules
Input Channel Alignment
At a Glance
The alignment procedure for an input allows an offset value to be added to the value measured by this input in order to compensate for a sensor shift (for example, adjusting the current value to 0°C of a Pt100 probe plunged into a bucket of ice for adjustment purposes).
Procedure
The following table describes the procedure used to align an input channel:
Step Action for one channel
1 Access the Debug screen.
2 Select the channel to align in the Parameters in progress area and double-click on the corresponding box in the Alignment column.
3 Click on the check box in the Target value field in the Adjust channel dialog box, and enter the new alignment value.
4 Confirm this new alignment value by clicking the Validate button.
Result: the new offset value is applied and appears in the Alignment column.
5 Close the Channel Adjust dialog box.
Notes
NOTE: When the offset alignment is modified by program using the WRITE_PARAM instruction, its value must fall between +1500 and -1500.
NOTE: The calculated offset value only acknowledges "keyboard" user commands. Simultaneous execution of the program (RUN) also adjusting the alignment will make the offset erroneous.
432
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Calibration of the TBX Analog Modules
35008167 12/2018
Calibration of the Remote TBX Analog Modules Chapter 40
Calibration of the Remote TBX Analog Modules
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter describes the calibration function and commands for Analog remote modules on a
Fipio bus.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Calibration Function for a Remote Analog TBX Module
TBX AES 400 Module Calibration
TBX AMS 620 Module Calibration
Page
35008167 12/2018
433
Calibration of the TBX Analog Modules
Calibration Function for a Remote Analog TBX Module
Introduction
This function is only available in online mode. It is used to recalibrate the channels of each input analog TBX module of an application.
Calibration can be used to correct long-term module drifts. It can also optimize the precision of the measurement at an ambient temperature other than 25°C.
Procedure
Procedure for accessing the Calibration function:
Step Action
1 Access the Fipio bus configuration screen.
2 Double-click on the analog TBX to calibrate.
3 Select the Calibration tab.
Result: the Calibration screen appears.
434
35008167 12/2018
Illustration
The figure below shows an example of a calibration screen.
Calibration of the TBX Analog Modules
35008167 12/2018
435
Calibration of the TBX Analog Modules
Description
The table below shows the different elements in the calibration screen and their functions.
Number Element
1
2
Tabs
Function
The tab in the foreground indicates the mode in progress (Calibration in this example). Every mode can be selected using the respective tab. The available modes are:
Calibration which can be accessed only in online mode,
Debug which can be accessed only in online mode,
Configuration.
Module area Specifies the abbreviated heading of the module.
In the same area there are 3 LEDs which indicate the status of the module in online mode:
RUN indicates the operating status of the module,
ERR indicates an internal fault in the module,
I/O indicates a fault from outside the module or an application fault.
3 Channel area Is used:
By clicking on the reference number, to display the tabs:
Description which gives the characteristics of the device.
I/O Objects (see EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Operating
Modes) which is used to presymbolize the input/output objects.
Fault which shows the device faults (in online mode).
4
5
By clicking on the Channel, to select the channel or group of channels (maximum 4) to debug. To the left of the symbol there is a copy of the CHx channel LED.
Specifies the MAST or FAST task configured. This heading is frozen.
General parameters area
Display area During calibration, all measurements are invalid, filtering and alignments are inhibited.
NOTE: All unavailable LEDs and commands are grayed out.
List
Calibration procedures differ according to the type of TBX AES 400
620
module.
436
35008167 12/2018
Calibration of the TBX Analog Modules
TBX AES 400 Module Calibration
Introduction
Calibration is performed globally for the module on channel 0.
You are advised to calibrate the module with no application loaded. Calibration can take place with the PLC task connected to the channel, in RUN or in STOP.
Calibration includes two stages:
Calibration of zero
Full-scale calibration.
Calibration of Zero
It is recommended to calibrate zero for the +/-20mV and +/-50mV ranges, and the thermocouple ranges. This involves calibrating zero for each of the channels simultaneously in the +/- 20 mV range at the required ambient temperature, by placing shunts directly on the input terminals of the base.
Full-Scale Calibration
Full-scale calibration is performed on channel 0, by placing the calibration source adjusted to full scale +/-0.01% directly on the input terminals of channel 0 of the base.
Precautions
In calibration mode, the measurement of all of the module’s channels are declared invalid, filtering and alignments are inhibited, and channel acquisition cycles may be lengthened.
With inputs other than channel 0 no longer acquired during calibration, the value sent to the application for the other channels is the last measured value before switching to calibration.
How to Calibrate the Module
The following table shows the procedure for calibrating the module:
Step
1
2
3
4
Action
Access the calibration adjustment screen
Double-click on channel 0.
Result: the question ‘Switch to recalibration mode?’ appears.
Answer Yes to the above question.
Result: the question ‘Perform 0 calibration?’ appears.
Place a shunt on all inputs of the module to perform 0 calibration, and answer Yes to the above question.
Otherwise, answer No not to perform 0 calibration.
35008167 12/2018
437
Calibration of the TBX Analog Modules
Step
5
6
7
8
Action
You can then perform full scale calibration.
Depending on the range to calibrate, connect a reference voltage to the voltage input of channel 0:
Reference voltage = 10 V (precision +/- 0.01%) to calibrate the module for
ranges 10 V and 0..10 V,
Reference voltage = 5 V (precision +/- 0.01%) to calibrate the module for ranges 0..5 V, 1..5V, 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA,
Reference voltage = 2 V (precision +/- 0.01%) to calibrate the module for ranges Pt1000 and Ni1000,
Reference voltage = 500 mV (precision +/- 0.01%) to calibrate the module for the 500 mV range,
Reference voltage = 200 mV (precision +/- 0.01%) to calibrate the module for ranges Pt100 and +/- 200 mV,
Reference voltage = 50 mV (precision +/- 0.01%) to calibrate the module for ranges +/- 200 mV and thermocouples E, J, K and N,
Reference voltage = 20 mV (precision +/- 0.01%) to calibrate the module for ranges +/- 200 mV and thermocouples B, R, S and T,
Warning: the reference 5 V is used to recalibrate the entire measurement string for ranges 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA, except for the 250 Ohm current shunt on the current input.
Once the reference is connected to the voltage input (for example 10 V), use the
Reference drop-down list to select this value. You may have to wait while the connected reference voltage stabilizes, then confirm the selection by clicking the command button Confirm. The ranges connected to this reference voltage (for example 10 V and 0..10 V) are calibrated automatically.
You may have to calibrate the module for the other ranges.
The command button Return To Factory Parameters is used to cancel all calibrations previously performed and return to the initial factory calibration.
Press the command button Save to acknowledge and save the new calibration to the module. When you quit the calibration screen without saving, a message appears to inform you that the calibration operations will be lost
438
35008167 12/2018
Calibration of the TBX Analog Modules
TBX AMS 620 Module Calibration
Introduction
Calibration is performed globally for the module on channel 0.
You are advised to calibrate the module with no application loaded. Calibration can take place with the PLC task connected to the channel, in RUN or in STOP. Calibration is full-scale calibration.
Full-Scale Calibration
Full-scale calibration is performed on channel 0, by placing the calibration source adjusted to full scale +/-0.01% directly on the input terminals of channel 0 of the base.
Precautions
In calibration mode, the measurement of all of the module’s channels are declared invalid, filtering and alignments are inhibited, and channel acquisition cycles may be lengthened.
With inputs other than channel 0 no longer acquired during calibration, the value sent to the application for the other channels is the last measured value before switching to calibration.
How to Calibrate the Module
The following table shows the procedure for calibrating the module:
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Action
Access the calibration adjustment screen
Double-click on channel 0.
Result: the question ‘Switch to recalibration mode?’ appears.
Answer Yes to the above question.
Result: the calibration window appears.
You can then perform full scale calibration.
Depending on the range to calibrate, connect a reference voltage to the voltage input of channel 0:
Reference voltage = 10 V (precision +/- 0.01%) to calibrate the module for ranges +/-10 V,
Reference voltage = 5 V (precision +/- 0.01%) to calibrate the module for ranges 0..5 V.
Once the reference is connected to the voltage input (for example 10 V), use the Reference drop-down list to select this value. You may have to wait while the connected reference voltage stabilizes, then confirm the selection by clicking the command button Validate. The ranges connected to this reference voltage are calibrated automatically.
You may have to calibrate the module for the other ranges.
The command button Return To Factory Parameters is used to cancel all calibrations previously performed and return to the initial factory calibration.
Press the command button Save to acknowledge and save the new calibration to the module.
When you quit the calibration screen without saving, a message appears to inform you that the calibration operations will be lost.
35008167 12/2018
439
Calibration of the TBX Analog Modules
440
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Diagnostics of the Analog TBX Modules
35008167 12/2018
Diagnostics of the Remote Analog TBX Modules Chapter 41
Diagnostics of the Remote Analog TBX Modules
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter describes the diagnostics function and commands for Analog remote modules on a
Fipio bus.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Diagnostics of an Analog Module
Detailed Diagnostics of an Analog Channel
Page
35008167 12/2018
441
Diagnostics of the Analog TBX Modules
Diagnostics of an Analog Module
At a Glance
The module Diagnostics function displays the current faults, if there are any, classified according to their category:
internal faults:
Module failures,
Self-testing in progress,
external faults:
Terminal block fault,
other faults:
Configuration fault,
Module missing or off,
Faulty channel
.
A module fault is indicated when certain LEDs change to red, such as:
In the Fipio bus window:
The connection point number of the module on the Fipio bus is red.
In all screens at module level:
The Err and I/O LEDs, according to the type of fault,
The Channel LED in the Channel field.
The red LED on the Fault tab.
NOTE: If you disconnect an extension module from the base module when this is configured, on power up the base module will appear faulty on the Fipio bus and the I/O LED will turn red.
442
35008167 12/2018
Diagnostics of the Analog TBX Modules
Procedure
The following table shows the procedure for accessing the Module fault screen.
Step
1
2
Action
Open the module on which you would like to perform diagnostics.
Click on the module reference in the channel zone and select the Fault tab.
Result: the list of module faults appears.
35008167 12/2018
Note: In the event of major failure, absence of the module, certain configuration faults, or a major configuration fault, access to the module diagnostics screen is not possible. The following message then appears on the screen: " The module is not present or different from the one configured in this position ."
443
Diagnostics of the Analog TBX Modules
Detailed Diagnostics of an Analog Channel
At a Glance
The Channel diagnostics function displays current errors, where these exist, classed according to their category:
Internal faults:
Channel failure,
External faults:
Sensor link fault,
Terminal block fault,
Range overshoot or undershoot fault,
Calibration fault,
Cold junction compensation fault,
Other errors:
Terminal block fault,
Configuration fault,
Communication fault,
Application fault,
24 V power supply fault,
Values outside limits,
Channel not ready.
A channel error appears in the Debug tab when the turns red.
LED, located in the Fault column,
444
35008167 12/2018
Diagnostics of the Analog TBX Modules
Procedure
The following table shows the procedure for accessing the Channel fault screen.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the Module debug screen.
For the faulty channel, click on the button column.
Result: the list of channel faults appears.
situated in the Fault
Note: Channel diagnostics information can also be accessed by program
( READ_STS instruction).
35008167 12/2018
445
Diagnostics of the Analog TBX Modules
446
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Glossary
35008167 12/2018
Glossary
D
Debug
Debug is a Unity Pro service enabling a direct module check to be made in online mode.
Discrete
Discrete inputs/outputs.
F
Fipio
Field bus used to connect sensor or actuator type devices.
I
IODDT
Input/Output Derived Data Type.
T
TBX
I/O modules remoted on the Fipio bus.
35008167 12/2018
447
Glossary
448
35008167 12/2018
Premium and Atrium Using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Index
35008167 12/2018
Index
A
addressing modules,
C
channel data structure for analog modules
T_ANA_IN_STD,
T_DIS_FIP_STD,
T_ANA_OUT_STD, channel data structure for I/O modules
T_DIS_IN_GEN,
T_DIS_OUT_GEN,
Characteristics
TBX CEP 1622,
TBX CSP 1622,
TBX CSP 1625,
TBX DES 1622,
TBX DES 1633,
TBX DES 16F22,
TBX DES 16S04,
TBX DMS 1025,
TBX DMS 1625,
TBX DMS 16C222,
TBX DMS 16P22,
TBX DMS 16S44,
TBX DSS 1235,
TBX DSS 1622,
TBX DSS 1625,
TBX EEP 08C22,
TBX EEP 1622,
TBX ESP 1622,
TSX ESP 08C22, configuring
discrete I/O modules, connecting power supplies,
D
debugging
discrete I/O modules, diagnosing,
35008167 12/2018
449
Index diagnostics
discrete I/O modules,
F
fallback mode
discrete I/O modules,
O
overflow monitoring
TBXAES400,
TBXAMS620,
TBXASS200,
P
parameter settings
power consumption,
discrete I/O modules,
S
sensor alignment
TBXAES400,
TBXAMS620,
T
T_ANA_IN_STD,
T_DIS_FIP_STD,
T_DIS_IN_GEN,
TBX LEP 020,
TBX LEP 030,
TBXAES400, installing,
TBXAMS620, installing,
450
TBXASS200, installing,
installing, installing, installing, installing, installing,
TBXCEP1622,
TBXCSP1622,
TBXCSP1625,
TBXDES1622, installing,
TBXDES1633 installing,
TBXDES16C22,
installing,
installing,
TBXDMS16C22,
installing,
installing,
installing,
TBXDSS1235, installing,
TBXDSS1622, installing,
TBXDSS1625, installing,
TBXDSS16C22, installing,
TBXEEP08C22, installing,
installing,
TBXGND015,
35008167 12/2018
TBXSUP10, installing,
TSXBLP10,
TSXESP08C22, installing,
W
Index
35008167 12/2018
451
Index
452
35008167 12/2018
Tải xuống
Đã cập nhật liên kết công khai
Liên kết công khai đến cuộc trò chuyện của bạn đã được cập nhật. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Liên kết công khai tài liệu
Quảng cáo
